JP2020127674A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To execute a prescribed performance according to a game state.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute a prescribed performance by a first suggestive mode, and if it is determined that a special condition is satisfied by determination means, can execute a prescribed performance in a second suggestive mode when a second condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the special condition is satisfied, if the first condition is satisfied however the second condition is not satisfied, the game machine executes the prescribed performance in the first suggestive mode. A backup storage part is provided as a continuous one storage region, and during writing, new backup data is inhibited from being written, and out of event occurrence conditions according to a plurality of electronic components, if the first occurrence condition and second occurrence condition are satisfied, if writing processing of backup data corresponding to one condition is executed, writing processing of backup data corresponding to the other condition is not executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-24

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result on the variable display device, the gaming state (game Therefore, there is a machine configured so as to give a predetermined game value to the player (a so-called pachinko machine) by changing the state of the machine.

Also, after setting a predetermined number of bets on a predetermined game medium for one game, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each variable. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing, and the variable display of all variable display devices is performed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium predetermined according to the prize is paid out, and when a specific prize is generated, the game state is given a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (the so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is an advantageous state for a player who easily wins a hit ball, or an advantageous state for a player. That is, the right is generated and the condition for paying out the prize balls is easily established.

In the pachinko game machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information), which is started on the variable display device based on the fact that the game ball has won the starting winning opening, a specific display mode determined in advance is displayed. When it is done, "big hit" occurs. The derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win is entered. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. The number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses even if the number of prizes does not reach a predetermined number. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left middle right symbol) continue for a predetermined time, and stop and shake in a state of being consistent with a specific display result. It is possible that big hits occur before the final result is displayed, because it is moving, scaling or deforming, or multiple symbols fluctuate in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are swapped. The effect performed in a state in which the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach production. Further, the reach state and the state thereof are referred to as the reach mode. Furthermore, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the variable display device is not the specific display result, the result is "disappear", and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed and a process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is executed at a predetermined timing.

JP, 2010-200902, A (paragraph 0085, Drawing 12).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the predetermined effect is executed in response to the satisfaction of the condition based on the detection of the motion of the player, the specific condition is not satisfied. If the predetermined effect is executed according to the specific suggestion mode, the effect may give a feeling of good race, which may rather reduce the interest.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined effect in accordance with a game situation.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of set values (for example, the set value "1 Based on the detection means (for example, the push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and the detection means. Then, a predetermined effect (for example, steps 047 IWS409 to S411, S806 to S834 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a mini character suggestion effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes. (A part to be executed), and a determination means for determining whether or not a special condition (for example, having decided to execute the mini character suggestion effect G) is satisfied (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 which executes step 047IWS827). And a first suggestion mode (for example, a mini character suggestive effect A to F) that suggests which setting value is set among the plurality of setting values, and a specific one of the plurality of setting values. And a second suggestion mode (for example, a mini character suggestive effect G) that suggests that the preset value is set to the set value (for example, the set value “6”), and the predetermined effect executing means is based on the detection by the detecting means. When one condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated once to six times) is satisfied, the predetermined effect can be executed in the first suggestion mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 047IWS809 to S825). At the same time, the second condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated seven times) based on the detection by the detection unit after the first condition is satisfied when the determination unit determines that the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect according to the second suggestion mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 047IWS826 to S828), and the determining means determines that the special condition is satisfied. If the first condition is satisfied but the second condition is not satisfied, the predetermined effect can be executed by the first suggestion mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 047IWS826). As a result, even if the execution of the mini character suggestive effect G is decided, unless the seventh push button 31B is pressed, the seventh mini character image 047IW003. Is not erased, and two mini character images 047IW003 are displayed and remain unchanged.),
further,
A control unit capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120) and memory contents can be retained even when power supply to a gaming machine is stopped, and information regarding the plurality of electronic components can be stored. Storage means (for example, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D), and the control means writes the information in the storage means when the event occurrence condition corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied. Processing (for example, writing processing by the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10) can be executed, and the storage unit corresponds to the storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and the second generation condition. The storage area in which the second information is written is provided as one continuous area (for example, the backup storage area 41AKA1 including the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13), and the first generation condition and the second generation condition are satisfied. In this case, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition is being executed, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition is not executed (for example, write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is ON). It is characterized by With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect in accordance with the game situation. Further, it becomes possible to manage information appropriately.

(Means 2) In the means 1, an effective period notification effect capable of executing an effective period notification effect (for example, operation promotion display) for informing that the detection by the detection means is an effective detection effective period (for example, an operation effective period) Equipped with an execution unit (for example, a portion that executes step 047IWS841 in the CPU 120 for effect control), the effective period notification effect execution unit does not execute the effective period notification effect for the detection effective period of the predetermined effect (for example, a mini character suggestion effect). Then, the operation promotion display is not displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who has performed the operation by noticing that the predetermined effective detection period is in effect.

(Means 3) Special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a probability variation state) that is easily controlled to the advantageous state in the means 1 or 2 by the means 1 or 2 (Specifically, the CPU 103) executes a step S117 to execute a setting process for starting the probability variation control), and the predetermined effect executing means has a predetermined time when the special state is controlled. The effect control may be limited (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the step 047IWS603 to execute the mini character suggestion effect only when not in the probable change state). According to such a configuration, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on being controlled in a special state.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is re-executed a predetermined number of times. Re-variable display execution means that can be executed (for example, can execute pseudo rendition) (for example, a portion of the process control CPU 120 that selects a process table including pseudo rendition in step 047IWS412 and executes steps 047IWS414 and S805). For each re-variable display, the condition established based on the detection by the detection unit including the first condition and the second condition can be initialized (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 047IWS834 to re-variate. The value of the operation counter may be reset every time). According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest for the predetermined effect.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is re-executed a predetermined number of times. Re-executable re-executable display execution means (eg, capable of executing pseudo rendition) (for example, a portion of the process control CPU 120 that selects a process table including pseudo rendition in step 047IWS412 and executes steps 047IWS414 and S805). According to the number of times of the re-variable display, the predetermined effect according to the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect according to the second suggestion mode can be executed at different ratios (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 047IWS617). Thus, in the pseudo-players, there is no case where a mini character suggestive effect having a lower accuracy is executed in a later change than the mini character suggesting effect executed in a previous change). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player an incentive to perform an operation for each revariable display.

(Means 6) Special effect execution capable of executing a special effect (for example, telop suggestion effect) that suggests which setting value is set by any of the means 1 to 5 and is different from the predetermined effect Means (for example, a portion in the CPU 120 for effect control that selects a process table including the telop suggestion effect in step 047IWS412 and executes steps 047IWS414 and S805), the predetermined effect execution means is a variable display in which the special effect is executed. , At least restricting the execution of the predetermined effect according to the second suggestion mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120, when Y in steps 047IWS605 and S611, selects the limiting mini character suggestion effect determination table in steps 047IWS607 and S615, and then 047IWS 608 and S616 are executed. See FIG. 8-20.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to restrict execution of an effect with excessively high accuracy as an effect that suggests which set value.

Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described later include the inventions according to the following means 9 to 16. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, information about an abnormality that has occurred, such as that disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-182314, is notified, and when the abnormality is resolved, the information about the abnormality is not saved, so it is possible to identify and analyze the defect. There are known gaming machines that may be difficult. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately managing information.

The gaming machine of means 9 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
A control unit capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components (for example, a microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and memory contents can be retained even when power supply to a gaming machine is stopped, and information regarding the plurality of electronic components can be stored. Storage means (for example, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, etc.),
The control unit executes a writing process (for example, a writing process by the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10) for writing the information in the storage unit when an event occurrence condition corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied. It is possible that the storage means has a continuous one area (a storage area where the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and a storage area where the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written). For example, it is provided as a backup storage unit 41AKA1 including the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13), and when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied, during the process of writing information corresponding to one condition. Does not execute the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition (for example, write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on).
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine described in means 9,
The generation condition may be achievable in accordance with an internal state of the control means (for example, CPU internal error 41AKC1, VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, etc.).
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 10,
The first occurrence condition can be satisfied according to an internal state of the control means (for example, CPU internal error 41AKC1, VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, etc.),
The second generation condition can be satisfied according to a processing result by the control means (for example, effect control error determination 41AKC3, etc.), and the second generation condition is satisfied when the first generation condition is satisfied. The writing process may be executed with priority over the case (see FIG. 15B, for example).
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 11,
When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, next time according to execution information (for example, the writing flag 41AKF1) indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition is being executed. The process of writing the information corresponding to the condition of may be restricted.
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

The gaming machine of means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 12,
In the writing process, the same information may be stored in a plurality of storage areas (for example, backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3).
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

The gaming machine of means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 13,
The control means, when a write condition different from the generation condition is satisfied, a process of writing game-related information different from the information on the plurality of electronic components to the storage means (for example, according to the setting of the backup control table 120T). Backup process).
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

The gaming machine of means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 14,
Output means (for example, connectors 90152 to 90155) capable of outputting a control signal for the plurality of electronic components and capable of outputting a read signal according to the stored information of the storage means may be provided.
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

The gaming machine of means 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 15,
A first output unit (for example, connectors 90152 to 90155) capable of outputting control signals for the plurality of electronic components, and a first output unit capable of outputting a read signal according to stored information of the storage unit unlike the first output unit. Two output means (for example, connector 90156 or the like) may be provided.
With such a configuration, information can be managed appropriately.

The present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 047IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 047IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 047IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed when a power supply is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change suggestion production setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a setting change suggestion production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting suggestion production setting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a telop suggestive effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the mini character suggestion production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the mini character suggestion production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the mini character suggestion production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the mini character suggestion production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a blackout notice production determination table and a button notice production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change suggestion notification process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the normal variable display of a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production aspect of setting change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production aspect of setting change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production aspect of a mini character suggestive production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production aspect of a mini character suggestive production. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is the block diagram which shows the various circuits and the like which are loaded in the production control baseplate. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a backup memory substrate, etc. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is the figure which shows the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing and processing priority. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a CPU exception event occurrence process and an example of a VDP error interrupt process. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for production control. It is the figure which shows the contents example of the production control command for game. It is the figure which shows the contents example of the production control command which becomes the test command. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the receiving order of a test command, and the process to perform. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a backup control table. It is a figure which shows the specific example which displays a maintenance history screen. It is a figure which shows the specific example which displays a maintenance history screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when a setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed. It is explanatory drawing of the characteristic part 41AK. It is explanatory drawing of the characteristic part 42AK. It is explanatory drawing of the characteristic part 42AK. It is explanatory drawing of the characteristic part 43AK. It is explanatory drawing of the characteristic part 44AK. It is explanatory drawing of the characteristic part 45AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. The variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended, and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. To display the first number of reserved memories, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state through which a game ball can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when entering one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (eg, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending storages, which is the number of universal figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that the player can press. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this public figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

It should be noted that, when the game ball enters (start winning) the starting winning opening during the period during which the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (a start prize has occurred, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit" symbol is given, and the jackpot symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, it is a “small hit”. Also, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, "missing symbol" is generated.

After the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" category is set. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big-hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., described later) are prepared, and the big hit is determined according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. Note that, similar to the big hit type, the "small hit" may be provided with a small hit type.

After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the big hit type.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of becoming "per figure" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

The time saving state and the probability changing state continue until any one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

The normal state is a game state other than the special state such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on as in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset). The state is controlled in the same manner as when the processing was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and/or excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing at which the display result (also called the fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later, the decorative design not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect in which is continued.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the design is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are displayed together and stopped, and after the jackpot gaming state is terminated, it is changed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation pattern (normal pattern). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" The common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is “miss”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach miss”) (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative design may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display before the execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display is simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit midfield effect for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit midfield effect, an effect that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion effect that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. Incidentally, during the small hit game state, some big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state of the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, big hit type that makes the subsequent game state a highly accurate state) big hit game By executing a common effect in the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-precision state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of ordinary figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when it has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By the transmission of the detection signal, passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, a production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), command for specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and effects (various effects according to the progress of the game based on the received effect control command, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described functions of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the lamp (supply of sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, for example. And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interruption prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, RAM 102 accessible settings, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, a backup flag state, and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power failure, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being restored from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Information such as the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and controlling the game state. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold display device 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure patterns.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of held memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the winning prize set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in correspondence with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not to display "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol fluctuation processing, the processing which does the setting in order to change the special design in the 1st special design display 4A and the 2nd special design display 4B, and the elapsed time after that special design starts fluctuation It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol It includes a process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". When the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process of opening the big hit ends.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the jackpot gaming state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation that notifies the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on that the display result is "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during opening of the small hitting ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a voice output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing in step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of the winning prize transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command for designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the main board 11 receives an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "miss". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Also, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 designating termination of the small hitting game state, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit medium effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit mid-game production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of end effect effect control at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game medium is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating “-” may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, referred to as bonus).

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 047IW)
Next, the characteristic part 047IW will be described. In the present characteristic portion 047IW, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player.

Further, in this example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a door opening sensor (not shown) that detects that the gaming machine frame 3 has been opened and outputs a detection signal. Further, in this example, the main board 11 is provided with a setting key (not shown) for switching to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In this example, since the board case (not shown) having the setting key is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming machine frame 3 closed. Is impossible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key requires the operation of the door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, only the store clerk who possesses the door key can operate it. Further, the setting key is also a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation. In the characteristic part 047IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used in combination. Further, in this example, a display monitor is arranged in the substrate case.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIG. 8-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. As shown in FIG. 8A, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of setting values “1” to “6”. Note that the setting is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps or the setting can be changed in 7 steps or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-1, in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-1, in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). In the case of “”, the jackpot probability is “2050/65536”, which is the lowest, and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the highest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with regard to the small hit, as shown in FIG. 8-1, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", the non-probability variation state (low probability state) and the probability variation state (high probability state). The small hit probability is constant at “6298/65536”, regardless of whether it is a probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. Even when the big hit probability is made different according to the set value, while the small hit probability is made constant, as shown in FIG. The number of judgment values for each set value may be configured to match by making the difference "6".

In addition, when it is determined as a big hit, the big hit type such as a normal big hit (non-probability variation big hit), a probability variation big hit, a sudden probability variation big hit (2R probability variation big hit) is also determined. Each jackpot type is determined with the same probability regardless of whether it is "1" to "6". Further, when it is determined that the small hit, it may be configured to be further determined into a plurality of types of small hits, but also for the small hit type, any of the set values "1" to "6". Regardless of whether there is it, each small hit type is determined with the same probability.

Although the variation pattern is determined when the variation display is started, each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic unit 047IW will be described. 8-2 to 8-4 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 047IW. It should be noted that in the characteristic unit 047IW, the processing of steps IWS001 and S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 and S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the production control means for measuring the time until the production control means (specifically, the production control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. The timer is set (step 047IWS003). In this case, the effect control means start waiting timer is set to a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means start waiting timer (step 047IWS004), and confirms whether the value of the effect control means start waiting timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 047IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 047IWS004 and the processes of steps 047IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the production control means start waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 047IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 047IWS003 to S005, the process of step 047IWS006 and thereafter is executed after waiting for the production control CPU 120 to be activated, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and restoration processes are executed. To be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a command at the time of restoration, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when turning on the power to the gaming machine (step 047IWS006).

In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the power-off process (see step 047IWS031) described later, but the RAM clear flag is cleared once in step 047IWS006 when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and then the clear switch is set. If so, a case is shown in which the RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 047IWS016 and S022), but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if the RAM clear flag is also cleared when the power-off process is executed, and then the clear switch is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the RAM clear flag is newly set. Good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4 (step 047IWS007). Specifically, in step 047IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 047IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 047IWS012.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 047IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the data check of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same process as step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 047IWS008). In step 047IWS008, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 047IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 047IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 047IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values “1” to “6”. (Step 047IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values “1” to “6”, the process proceeds to step 047IWS011.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N in step 047IWS008) or the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "6" (Y in step 047IWS009). The CPU 103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 047IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS012.

When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values “1” to “6” (N in step 047IWS009), the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process for changing the set value. It is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag indicating that is set (step 047IWS011). If the setting change flag is set (step 047IWS011; Yes), that is, if power interruption or the like occurs during the change of the set value and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step 047IWS012.

In step 047IWS012, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor is ON (step 047IWS012). If the output signal from the door opening sensor is ON, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key is ON (step 047IWS013). If the setting key is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 047IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 047IWS015).

In this example, the RAM clear processing includes a RAM clear 1 processing (see step 047IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 processing (see step 047IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the serial ratio and Information for performance display such as winning ratio, base, etc., and setting value information are retained without being cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the areas other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the performance ratio such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is displayed. Information is not cleared but retained. In addition, in the RAM clear 2 processing, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 processing is larger than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 processing.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 047IWS016), and proceeds to step 047IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor is off (N in step 047IWS012), the setting key is off (N in step 047IWS013), or the output signal from the clear switch is off (step 047IWS014). In N), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 047IWS017).

Next, the CPU 103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 047IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 047IWS018). When the wait time of 4 ms has elapsed, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 047IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 047IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 controls the display monitor to display a display indicating that a RAM error has occurred (for example, a display of "E"). Further, the CPU 103 controls to externally output the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 047IWS020). Then, the processing after step 047IWS018 is repeatedly executed.

As a result of the processing of steps 047IWS007 to S020 being executed, in this characteristic unit 047IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in step 047IWS007, S008, Y in step 047IWS009), a power failure or the like occurs during setting change. In the case (Y of step 047IWS011), the RAM is cleared on condition that the setting key is turned on and the clear switch is turned on in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, and the setting values after step 047IWS025 are set. It can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the setting key and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting change flag is not set (step 047IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 047IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is ON, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 047IWS022).

In this example, by executing the processes of step 047IWS022 and step 047IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Then, after that, before the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started, there are multiple scenes where it is checked whether the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on. However, it is determined whether the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on by checking whether or not the RAM clear flag is set instead of directly checking the state of the clear switch. (See step 047IWS025, S034, S048).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor is on (step 047IWS023). If the output signal from the door opening sensor is ON, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key is ON (step 047IWS024). If the setting key is on, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 047IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 controls to send a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value is executed to the effect control CPU 120 (step 047IWS026). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS030.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting change command indicating execution of the setting change process for changing the set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 047IWS027). ). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 047IWS028). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (that is, if an abnormality in the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 causes the setting value determination buffer (a storage area provided in the RAM 102 for storing the current setting value). The set value is set to "1" (step 047IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM abnormality flag.

In addition, on the production control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5). Is displayed, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, the production control board 12 may be configured to display a "maintenance mode" or the like and shift to the maintenance mode by pressing an operation button for production such as the push button 31B. The "maintenance mode" is, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock, the history of various error occurrences (a record of when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (when the setting value was changed and after the change). This is a mode in which you can check the recorded settings. When the setting key is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also completed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 047IWS030). Then, when the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 shifts to step 047IWS031 and executes power-off processing (step 047IWS031). In the power-off process of step 047IWS031, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is in the ON state). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 103 executes a process for stopping power supply for storing necessary data (for example, backup flag, checksum) in the backup RAM area. To do.

Next, the CPU 103 identifies the set value stored in the set value confirmation buffer, and displays the identified set value on the display monitor (step 047IWS032). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to externally output the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 047IWS033).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 047IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process directly proceeds to step 047IWS043.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 047IWS035) and starts the setting change process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the initial setting completion flag indicating that the value has been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time after the game machine is powered on (step 047IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether the switch is on or off) of the clear switch. For example, in the clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the clear switch is on, and a value of "0" is set when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting completion flag is set (if the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the power of the gaming machine was turned on), the process proceeds to step 047IWS039.

If the flag set for the first time is not set (that is, if the value has not been set in the clear switch buffer even once after the game machine is powered on), the CPU 103 turns the clear switch buffer on. The value shown (for example, "1") is set (step 047IWS037). Further, the CPU 103 sets the initial setting completion flag (step 047IWS038).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 047IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is in the on state or the off state) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, the previous clear switch buffer is set to a value of "1" when the previously confirmed clear switch is in the on state, and is set to a value of "0" in the off state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 047IWS040). Next, the CPU 103 turns off the value set in the clear switch buffer last time (for example, “0”) and turns on the value set in the clear switch buffer (for example, “1”). It is confirmed whether or not (step 047IWS041).

If the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is off and the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is on, the CPU 103 updates and displays the set value displayed on the display monitor. At the same time, it is stored in the set value confirmation buffer (update storage for the set value already stored) (step 047IWS042). For example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor, the display on the display monitor is updated to "2" and the set value "2" is stored in the set value determination buffer. When "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor, the display on the display monitor is updated to "3" and the set value "3" is stored in the set value determination buffer. When "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor, the display on the display monitor is updated to "1" and the set value "1" is stored in the set value determination buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key is on (step 047IWS043). If the setting key remains on, the process proceeds to step 047IWS030, the processes of steps 047IWS030 to S043 are repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key is off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 047IWS044.

When the RAM clear flag is not set by executing the processing of the above steps 047IWS025 to S043 (that is, when the clear switch is not turned on when the gaming machine is powered on) (steps 047IWS025 and S034). N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 047IWS026) and the setting confirmation process (particularly step 047IWS032) is performed, but the setting change process is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the gaming machine is powered on) (step 047IWS025, S034 Y), a setting change command is transmitted (step 047IWS027). At the same time, a setting confirmation process (especially step 047IWS032) and a setting change process (especially 047IWS035 to S042) are performed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 047IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed at the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the process of step 047IWS033. The security information timer is set in step 047IWS044, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output to the outside.

On the other hand, in this example, the security signal is output to the outside even when a RAM abnormality occurs by executing the processing of step 047IWS020, but in this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output to the outside until it is done.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 047IWS045). Further, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor (step 047IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 047IWS047).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 047IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 047IWS049. Note that the processing of steps 047IWS049 and S050 in this feature unit 047IW is the same as the processing of steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process to clear the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (047IWS051). Note that the processing of steps 047IWS052 to S055 in this feature unit 047IW is the same as the processing of steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram of a process executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic unit 047IW, as shown in FIG. 8-5, when the setting key is turned on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. For example, if the setting confirmation process (particularly step 047IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly 047IWS035 to S042) are executed and the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 047IWS051)) is executed and the clear switch is off, Only the setting confirmation process (particularly step 047IWS032) is executed and the restoration process (step 047IWS049) is executed. If the setting key is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 047IWS051)) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, it is restored. Only the process (step 047IWS049) is executed.

Next, a display mode of the display monitor in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-6(A) and 8-6(B), when the power is turned off (power is cut) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor ends. When the big winning game is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing of turning off the power, the big prize hole is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-6(C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key is turned on. The setting check process is executed by the CPU 103 under the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor in this way, as shown in FIG. 8-6(D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the clerk or the like in the game hall in the setting change process. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor is sequentially updated every time (for example, every time the clear switch is operated, the numerical values are updated as 1→2→3→1→... ). In addition, the set value displayed on the display monitor is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-6(E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor based on that the setting key is turned off by the operation of the store clerk or the like in the game hall, thereby causing the store clerk or the like in the game hall. Is notified that the new setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 8-6(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the special winning opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state in which the game can be played, that is, the variation display result, the jackpot type, the variation pattern determination lottery, the prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

It should be noted that the setting change process in the characteristic unit 047IW exemplifies a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor, but the present invention is not limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor in the setting change process is not a setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic part 047IW), or a setting value that is most advantageous to the player. ("3" in the case of this characteristic part 047IW) may be displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-6, the setting value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display on the display monitor when confirming or changing the setting value. Not limited to the mode, for example, the setting value may be displayed using the second and subsequent displays on the display monitor. Further, for example, the set value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor. In this case, for example, if the setting value is "1", a 4-digit display of "-S-1" is displayed on the display monitor, and if the setting value is "2", 4 digits of "-S-2" is displayed on the display monitor. Digits may be displayed, or if the set value is "3", 4-digit "-S-3" may be displayed on the display monitor. Further, for example, the set value may be displayed on all four-digit displays on the display monitor. For example, if the setting value is "1", the display monitor displays four digits of "1111", and if the setting value is "2", the display monitor displays four digits of "2222". Good.

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, the process of the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the present feature unit 047IW will be described. 8-7 and 8-8 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 047IWS171). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step 047IWS172). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating "second" (step 047IWS173). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 047IWS174).

By performing the processing of steps 047IWS172 to S174, in the characteristic portion 047IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in accordance with the order of starting winning in which the game balls win the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute and.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number of the special symbol pointer = 1 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 047IWS175). Specifically, the CPU 103, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages=1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the content of each storage area (step 047IWS176). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each of the first reserved storage buffers. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, the CPU 103, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages=n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved storages=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 047IWS177). The CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 047IWS178). In the characteristic unit 112, as described above, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 047IWS047. The setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of 047IWS178.

In this example, the same setting value command is transmitted when the setting value command is transmitted in step 047IWS047 and when the setting value command is transmitted in step 047IWS178, but the setting value command is different. It may be configured to send a command. For example, in step 047IWS047, a command that directly specifies a set value (for example, commands 9E01(H) to 9E06(H) according to the set values “1” to “6”) is transmitted, while in step 047IWS178, the set value is set. It may be configured such that the identifiable fluctuation pattern command is transmitted and the fluctuation pattern commands are prepared for the number of set values (for example, when the set value is “1”, commands 1C00(H) to are prepared as the fluctuation pattern commands). , The command 2C00(H)-is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "2", the command 3C00(H)-is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "3", and the variation pattern command at the setting value "4". Command 4C00(H)- is prepared, a setting value "5" prepares a command 5C00(H)- as a variation pattern command, and a setting value "6" prepares a command 6C00(H)- as a variation pattern command. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, if the different variation pattern command is transmitted for each set value even when the same variation pattern is used, the total number of variation patterns×the number of set values (6 in this example) ) Change pattern command is required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, the setting value command may be transmitted only when a specific fluctuation pattern is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern may be provided with the fluctuation pattern commands for the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are changed pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. May be provided.

In this example, the same set value command is sent as the set value command (see step 047IWS047) sent when the power is turned on and the set value command (see step 047IWS178) sent when the fluctuation starts. It is not limited to various forms. For example, even if the set value command for power-on and the set value command for fluctuation start are configured as separate commands and different set value commands are transmitted at power-on and at fluctuation start Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. Good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if it is the setting value "2", The variation pattern command A-2 is transmitted, the variation pattern command A-3 is transmitted when the setting value is "3", and the variation pattern command A-4 is transmitted when the setting value is "4". The variation pattern command A-5 may be transmitted when the set value is "5", and the variation pattern command A-6 may be transmitted when the set value is "6".

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the setting value, and depending on which setting value is on the effect control CPU 120 side. It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. If the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 is selected or the variation pattern A-3 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 4, the variation pattern A-4 is selected or the variation pattern A. -4 is selected at a high rate, variation pattern A-5 is selected if the setting value is 5, or variation pattern A-5 is selected at a high rate, and variation pattern A-6 is selected at the setting value 6. Alternatively, the variation pattern A-6 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-6 may have the same variation time, but may be configured to have different presence/absence of pseudo-repetition, number of pseudo-repetitions, presence/absence of reach, and type. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio is selected. The variation pattern may be selected with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation, for example.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 047IWS179). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designating command in the case of the probability variation state, and controls to transmit a time saving state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judging module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8-1) with the random number value MR1 and, if they match, determines a big hit or a small hit. The program to execute. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 047IWS180), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 047IWS181). Then, when it is determined to be a small hit (Y of step 047IWS181), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 047IWS182), and proceeds to step 047IWS186.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N in step 047IWS181), that is, if it is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step 047IWS186.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 047IWS180), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step 047IWS183). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table to determine the type (eg, normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, or sudden variation) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. Big hit) is determined as the type of big hit (step 047IWS184).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 047IWS185). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable variation big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 047IWS186). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the symbol "-" which is a falling symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, "7" which is a big hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to a big hit type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5" which is a small hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 047IWS187).

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the characteristic unit 047IW will be described. FIG. 8-9 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the characteristic unit 047IW. In the characteristic unit 047IW, the processing of steps 047IWS201 to S206 is the same as the processing of steps S71 to S76 shown in FIG.

When the effect control process process of step 047IWS206 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small symbol process process (step 047IWS207). In this example, by executing the small symbol process process of step 047IWS207, the variable display of the small symbols is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbols in the image display device 5, separately from the variable display of the decorative symbols. It In this example, the small design has a smaller display size than the decorative design, and is less visible than the decorative design. Further, in this example, when the pseudo-relation is executed, the variable display is once again executed after the pseudo-repeated chance eye symbol is temporarily displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the re-variation is executed once or plural times. However, regarding the variable display of the small symbols, the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed without accompanying the temporary stop display or the re-variation even when the pseudo-link is executed. Further, in this example, as will be described later, a blackout notice effect in which the display screen of the image display device 5 goes dark (blackout) may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, but the small symbol Regarding the variable display of, the small symbol variable display is continuously executed so that it can be visually recognized even while the blackout notice effect is being executed.

Further, in the present example, as will be described later, the setting change suggestion effect is executed in the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display is such that the decorative pattern vibrates up and down. As for the variable display of the small symbols, the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed without the vibration of the symbols even while the setting change suggesting effect is being executed.

The process of step 047IWS208 is the same as the process of step S77 shown in FIG. When the effect random number updating process in step 047IWS208 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting change suggestion notification process for executing the setting change suggestion notification for informing that the setting change suggestion effect may be executed. (Step 047IWS209). Then, the process returns to step 047IWS203.

(Command analysis process)
8-10 and 8-11 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 047IWS205). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 047IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 047IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 047IWS303). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the set value command (step 047IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 047IWS305).

If the received production control command is a setting value abnormality error command (step 047IWS306), the production control CPU 120 executes setting value abnormality error notification (step 047IWS307). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as "A setting value error is occurring" on the image display device 5, or outputs a sound or an error sound indicating the setting value error from the speakers 8L and 8R. It outputs and controls the game effect lamp 9 and the LED to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the set value abnormality error is notified, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs a maximum volume voice or an error sound, and the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits the maximum brightness (for example, a full-color LED). In this case, it is desirable to emit white light.

If the received production control command is a command for restoration (step 047IWS308), the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a restoration screen (step 047IWS309). For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a character display such as “in recovery” or to display an initial result (for example, a combination of symbols “123”).

If the received effect control command is the initialization designation command (step 047IWS310), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial screen (step 047IWS311). For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a game machine maker's logo display or an initial result (for example, a combination of symbols “123”). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets an initialization flag indicating that the initialization process (RAM clear process) has been executed (step 047IWS312).

If the received production control command is a variation pattern command (production control command for designating a variation pattern) (step 047IWS320), the production control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 122. The data is stored in the area (step 047IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 047IWS322).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (effect control command for specifying whether to make a big hit or small hit, big hit type, small hit type) (step 047IWS323), for effect control The CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 047IWS324).

If the received production control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (a production control command that designates that the stop symbol of the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed) (step 047IWS325), the production control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag ( Step 047IWS326).

If the received production control command is a big hit start designation command (a production control command that specifies the start of a big hit game) (step 047IWS327), the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 047IWS328).

If the received production control command is a big hit end designation command (a production control command that specifies the end of a big hit game) (step 047IWS329), the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step 047IWS330).

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 047IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS301.

(Variable display start setting process)
8-12 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 047IWS401). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read in step 047IWS 401 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (stop). (Symbol) is determined (step 047IWS402). That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step 047IWS402, so that the variable display pattern of the identification information is displayed in accordance with the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means (stop of the decorative pattern). A display result determining means for determining (pattern) is realized. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop design of the decorative design in the decorative design display result storage area. In step 047IWS402, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on only the variation pattern command. ..

In step 047IWS402, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates the probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stop symbol. Further, for example, when the received display result designating command indicates a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which even three symbols are the same as the stop symbols. To do.

Moreover, when the received display result designation command indicates the sudden change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the decoration patterns of the sudden change jackpot pattern. For example, the effect control CPU 120 suddenly determines a combination of symbols "357" as the sudden variation big hit symbol.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative designs of the small hit design. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of symbols of "357", which is the same as the sudden probability big hit symbol, as the small hit symbol.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a failure, a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the reach effect is involved, the combination of the decorative designs in which the left and right two designs are aligned is determined.

When the pseudo pattern is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 determines, in step 047IWS402, a chance eye symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo sequence. , A combination of a big hit pattern that does not reach and one pattern that is offset by one) are also determined.

CPU120 for production control extracts the random number for determining a stop design, for example, and uses the stop design determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the design and the numerical value are associated with each other to determine the stop design of the design. decide. That is, the stop design is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting change suggestion effect setting process for setting the presence and type of the setting change suggestion effect indicating the possibility that the setting value has been changed (step 047IWS403).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting suggestion effect setting process for setting the presence and type of the setting suggestion effect that suggests which of the set values “1” to “6” the currently set setting value is. Is executed (step 047IWS404). In this example, as the setting suggestion effect, a telop suggestion effect executed in a mode of displaying a telop display on the image display device 5 and a mini character executed in a mode of displaying a plurality of mini character images on the image display device 5. Suggestive production can be executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the announcement effect setting process for setting the presence and type of the announcement effect (step 047IWS405). In this example, as the notice effect, it is possible to execute a blackout notice effect in which the display screen of the image display device 5 goes dark (blackout) and a button notice effect accompanied by the operation of the player.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and various notice effects such as a step-up notice effect, a group notice effect, and an accessory notice effect may be executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the blackout notice effect is decided in the notice effect setting process of step 047IWS405 (step 047IWS406). If execution of the blackout notice effect has not been decided, the process proceeds to step 047IWS409. If the execution of the blackout advance notice effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the setting change suggestion effect has been determined in the setting change suggestion effect setting process of step 047IWS403 (step 047IWS407). If execution of the setting change suggesting effect has not been decided, the process proceeds to step 047IWS409. If the execution of the setting change suggesting effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 sets a notice restriction flag indicating that the execution of the blackout notice effect is limited (step 047IWS408). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS409.

In this example, the blackout notice effect is executed at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, in the present example, the setting change suggestion effect is also executed at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, and is also executed in such a manner that the left, middle and right decorative patterns are vibrated vertically in the image display device 5. Therefore, if both the blackout advance notice effect and the setting change suggestion effect are executed at the start of the change of the decorative pattern, the display screen of the image display device 5 is blacked out (black out). Even if the decorative pattern is vibrated vertically, the player cannot recognize the setting change suggestion effect. Therefore, in this example, when execution of both the blackout advance notice effect and the setting change suggestion effect is determined, the advance notice flag is set in step 047IWS408 to limit the execution of the blackout notice effect. doing.

In addition, in this example, when the execution of both the blackout notice effect and the setting change suggestion effect is determined, the case where the execution of the blackout notice effect is restricted is shown, but such a mode I can't stop. For example, in the case of executing the first variable display after turning on the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the blackout advance notice effect and the setting change suggestion effect are configured by not performing the lottery itself of the blackout notice effect. May be configured so that there is no case where they are executed in duplicate.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the mini character suggestion effect is decided in the setting suggestion effect setting process of step 047IWS404 (step 047IWS409). If the execution of the mini character suggestive effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display eight mini character images (step 047IWS410). In this case, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the display of eight mini character images is started based on the start timing of the mini-character suggestion effect, and the execution of the mini-character suggestion effect is started. You may control. Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the operation number counter for counting the number of operations by the player in the mini character suggestion effect to 0 (step 047IWS411).

In this example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern accompanied by the pseudo-relation is executed, it is possible to determine the execution of the mini character suggestive effect for each change including the initial change and each re-change, but in step 047IWS409, the pseudo character When the execution of the mini-character suggestion effect is decided in the first variation of the variation display of the decorative pattern accompanied by a series, it is determined to be Y, and the process proceeds to steps 047IWS410 and S411.

Next, the effect control CPU 120, in the case where it has been decided to execute the variation pattern, the setting change suggesting effect, the telop suggesting effect, and the notice effect, a process corresponding to the setting change suggesting effect, the telop suggesting effect, and the notice effect. A table is selected (step 047IWS412). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 047IWS413).

The process table is a table in which process data that the production control CPU 120 refers to when performing control of the production device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (effect parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation forming the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern are described. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decorative pattern in a variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12. Further, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

If execution of the setting change suggestion effect is determined in the setting change suggestion effect setting process of step 047IWS403, a process table including the setting change suggestion effect is selected in step 047IWS412, and step 047IWS414 is selected according to the selected process table. By executing the process of step 047IWS805 of the variable display effect process (step S172), the setting change suggestion effect is executed when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

If execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined in the setting suggestion effect setting process of step 047IWS404, a process table including the telop suggestion effect is selected in step 047IWS412, and step 047IWS414 and variable display are selected according to the selected process table. By executing the process of step 047IWS805 of the medium effect process (step S172), the telop suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

When execution of the blackout notice effect is determined in the notice effect setting process of step 047IWS405, a process table including the blackout notice effect is selected in step 047IWS412, and step 047IWS414 and variable are selected according to the selected process table. By executing the process of step 047IWS805 of the display effect process (step S172), the blackout notice effect is executed at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. However, in this case, even if it is decided to execute the blackout notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 does not include the blackout notice effect if the notice limitation flag (see step 047IWS408) is set. Select a process table and limit execution of blackout notice production.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 operates as an effect device (image display device 5 as effect part, effect part as effect part) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step 047IWS414).

In addition, in the characteristic part 047IW, the effect control CPU 120 performs control such that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command in a one-to-one manner. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 047IWS415). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 047IWS416), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Setting change suggestion production setting process)
FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change suggestion effect setting process (step 047IWS403). In the setting change suggestion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first sets whether or not the first-time fluctuation completed flag indicating that the first fluctuation display has already been executed after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. Is confirmed (step 047IWS501). If the first variation completed flag is set (that is, if variation display is to be performed for the second time and after after power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1), the processing ends. If the first variation completed flag is not set (if the first variation display is performed after powering on the pachinko gaming machine 1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first variation completed flag (step 047IWS502). ), and confirms whether the initialization flag is set (step 047IWS503). If the initialization flag has not been set (that is, if the recovery process has been executed), the process is terminated as it is.

If the initialization flag is set (that is, if the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed), the effect control CPU 120 changes the setting for determining the presence and type of the setting change suggesting effect. A lottery process based on a random number is performed using the suggestion effect determination table to determine the presence/absence and type of the setting change suggestion effect (step 047IWS504). Then, when determining to execute the setting change suggesting effect, effect control CPU 120 stores information capable of specifying the determined type of setting change suggesting effect in the setting change suggesting effect storage area provided in RAM 122. (Step 047 IWS505).

FIG. 8-14 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the setting change suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 8-14, in the setting change suggestion effect determination table, determination values are assigned for no setting change suggestion effect, execution of setting change suggestion effect A, and execution of setting change suggestion effect AB, respectively. ing. In this example, the “setting change suggestion effect A” is an effect that is executed in such a manner as to vibrate the left, right, and middle decorative patterns up and down on the image display device 5 when the variable display of the decorative patterns is started. Further, the “setting change suggestion effect B” vibrates the left, middle, and right decorative designs up and down on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display of the decorative designs, and also displays an effect image around the left, middle, and right decorative designs. It is an effect executed according to the display mode.

As shown in FIG. 8-14, in this example, the setting change suggestion effect A and the setting change suggestion are performed with different probabilities depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” is currently set. The performance B is configured to be determined. As shown in FIG. 8-14, in the present example, the setting change suggestive effect B is configured to be executable when the set values “4” to “6” are relatively advantageous to the player, If the set values are relatively unfavorable to the player, "1" to "3", the setting change suggestion effect B is not executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-14, in this example, the probability that the setting change suggestion effect B is executed is highest when the setting value is “6”, and the setting change suggestion is performed when the setting value is “5”. The probability that the effect B will be executed is next highest, and the probability that the setting change suggestion effect B will be executed when the set value is “4” is next highest. Therefore, in this example, even when the setting change suggesting effect is executed, the player is expected to be set to an advantageous setting value particularly when the setting change suggesting effect B is executed. Can be made.

In addition, in this example, the setting change suggestion effect may be executed when the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed by executing the process of step 047IWS503. In this example, as already described, the setting change process may be executed and the setting value may be changed when the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed when the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, if the setting change suggestion effect is executed by configuring the setting change suggestion effect so that it can be executed when the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed, it is possible that the player has changed the set value. Can be suggested.

In this example, when the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. Although it is executed, the configuration change suggesting effect may not be executed with a low probability in some cases, but the setting change suggesting effect may be executed with a probability of 100%.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting change suggesting effect is configured to be executable when the initialization designation command is received (when the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed) is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, if a setting change command is received, the setting change suggestive effect is configured to be executable, or the setting value has been changed, or other special purpose that can identify the possibility that the setting value has been changed. The setting change suggestion effect is configured to be executable based on the reception of the command that can identify the possibility that the setting value has been changed in some form, such as configuring the setting change suggestion effect to be executable when a command is received. May be.

In addition, in this example, the processing of step 047IWS501 is executed, so that the setting change suggestion effect can be executed only when the first variation display is executed after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

It should be noted that the setting change suggestion effect is not limited to the mode in which the setting change suggestion effect can be executed only after the power is turned on, and the setting change suggestion effect is also performed when the change display for the second time and after is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be configured to be executable. Further, for example, it is possible to execute the setting change suggestion effect based on the lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes or more) after the last variable display is finished (or in the customer waiting demonstration display state). You may. In addition, for example, when the game history data is configured to be transmittable to a mobile terminal (a so-called mobile interlocking type), a setting change suggestion is made based on the fact that the player has performed a game ending operation and the game history data has been reset. The effect may be configured to be executable. Further, for example, the setting change suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on the fact that the player has been changed by some method. In addition, for example, when a real-time clock is installed, a setting change suggestion effect is displayed in a variable display executed in a specific time zone (for example, 9:00 to 11:00) based on date and time information from the real-time clock. It may be configured to be executable. However, it is desirable to configure the number of times the setting change suggestion effect is executed to be one, for example, by executing the setting change suggestion effect in the first variable display in the time zone of 9:00 to 11:00. ..

(Setting suggestion production setting process)
FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting suggestion effect setting process (step 047IWS404). In the setting suggestion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on a random number using a telop suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the telop suggestion effect, and determines the presence or absence of the telop suggestion effect. (Step 047IWS601). When the execution of the telop suggestive effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 stores information that can specify that the execution of the telop suggestive effect has been determined in the telop suggestive effect storage area provided in the RAM 122 ( Step 047IWS602).

FIG. 8-16 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the telop suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 8-16, in the telop suggestion effect determination table, determination values are assigned for no telop suggestion effect and for execution of the telop suggestion effect, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 8-16, in this example, the execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined with different probabilities depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” the currently set value is. Is configured. As shown in FIG. 8-16, in the present example, the telop suggestive effect can be executed when the set value is “4” to “6” which is relatively advantageous to the player. When the set value is "1" to "3" which is disadvantageous to the player, the telop suggestion effect is not executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-16, in this example, the probability that the telop suggestion effect is executed is highest when the setting value is “6”, and the telop suggestion effect is executed when the setting value is “5”. The probability of being performed is next highest, and the probability that the telop suggestive effect is executed when the setting value is “4” is next highest. Therefore, in this example, particularly when the telop suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to make the player expect the possibility of being set to an advantageous set value, and to suggest a highly accurate set value. It is configured to be able to.

The determination rate of whether or not to execute the telop suggestion effect may be changed according to the jackpot expectation. For example, in a variable display with a high jackpot expectation level, other notice effects are preferentially executed, and thus the execution of the telop suggestion effect may be limited.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the probability change state is in progress (step 047IWS603). Note that whether or not the probability variation state is in progress can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the probability variation state background designation command is received as the background designation command. If it is not in the probable state, the process is terminated. Therefore, in this example, the mini character suggestion production can be executed by executing the processing of step 047IWS604 and thereafter only when the probability change state is not in progress.

When it is determined in step 047IWS603 that the probability change state is in progress, a dedicated setting suggestion effect different from the mini character suggestion effect may be configured to be executable. Further, for example, the configuration suggestive effect may be configured to be executable during the time saving state or the high base state, not only during the probability changing state.

If it is not in the probability changing state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pseudo link is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern which is started this time (step 047IWS604). Whether or not the pseudo-link is executed is determined by, for example, checking whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 047IWS401 of the variable display start setting process includes the pseudo-link. it can.

If it is not the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-relation (N in step 047IWS604), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the telop suggestion effect is decided in step 047IWS601 (step 047IWS605). If the execution of the telop suggestion effect has not been determined, the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal mini-character suggestion effect determination table as a table for determining the presence and type of the mini-character suggestion effect (step 047IWS606). If the execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 selects the limiting mini-character suggestion effect determination table as a table for determining the presence and type of the mini-character suggestion effect (step 047IWS607).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the mini character suggestion effect determination table selected in steps 047IWS606 and S607 to determine the presence and type of the mini character suggestion effect (step 047IWS608). When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the mini-character suggestive effect, the CPU 120 stores the information capable of specifying the determined type of the mini-character suggestive effect in the mini-character suggestive effect storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 047IWS609). ).

8-17 to 8-20 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the mini character suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, in the mini character suggestion effect determination table, there is no mini character suggestion effect, mini character suggestion effect A is executed, mini character suggestion effect B is executed, mini character suggestion effect C is executed, and mini character suggestion is executed. A determination value is assigned to each of execution D, mini character suggestion E, mini character suggestion F, mini character suggestion G, and mini character suggestion H.

In this example, when performing the mini character suggestive effect, the effect is started in a state where eight mini character images are displayed, and the mini character image is set to 1 each time the player presses the push button 31B once. An effect that is erased one by one is executed.

In the "mini-character suggestion production A", up to one mini-character image is deleted according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player, but even if the push button 31B is operated for the second time and thereafter, the mini-character is no longer required. It is an effect that the image is not erased. Further, in the "mini-character suggestion effect B", up to two mini-character images are erased in response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player, but even if the push button 31B is operated for the third time or more, it is no longer required. This is an effect in which the mini character image is not erased. Further, in the "mini-character suggestion effect C", up to three mini-character images are deleted according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player. However, even if the push button 31B is operated for the fourth time or later, it is no longer required. This is an effect in which the mini character image is not erased.

Further, in the "mini-character suggestion effect D", up to four mini-character images are deleted according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player, but even if the push button 31B is operated for the fifth time or more, more This is an effect in which the mini character image is not erased. Further, in the "mini-character suggestive effect E", up to five mini-character images are deleted according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player, but even if the push button 31B is operated for the sixth time and thereafter, no more. This is an effect in which the mini character image is not erased. Further, in the "mini-character suggestion effect F", up to six mini-character images are deleted according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player, but even if the push button 31B is operated for the seventh time or more This is an effect in which the mini character image is not erased.

Further, in the "mini-character suggestive effect G", if the player pushes down the push button 31B up to seven times, up to seven mini character images are deleted, but the push button 31B is operated after the eighth time. Also, this is an effect in which the mini character image is not deleted any more (hence, only one mini character image remains). Further, in the “mini-character suggestive effect H”, if the player presses the push button 31B up to seven times, all eight mini character images are deleted (the seventh and eighth minis are operated by the seventh operation. (The character image is erased at the same time).

As shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, in the present example, the mini character suggestion effect A with different probabilities depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” is currently set. ~ Execution of the mini character suggestive effect H is configured to be determined. As shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, when the setting value is “1”, the probability that the execution of the mini character suggestive effect A will be determined is relatively high. When the set value is “2”, the probability that the execution of the mini character suggestion effect B is decided is relatively high, and the precision of the set value suggestion is higher than that of the mini character suggestion effect A. When the set value is “3”, the probability that the execution of the mini character suggestion effect C is decided is relatively high, and the precision of the set value suggestion is higher than that of the mini character suggestion effect B.

When the set value is "4", the probability that the execution of the mini character suggestive effect D is decided is relatively high, and the precision of the set value suggestion is higher than that of the mini character suggestive effect C. When the set value is “5”, the probability that the execution of the mini character suggestive effect E will be determined is relatively high, and the precision of the set value suggestion is higher than that of the mini character suggestive effect D. Further, when the setting value is “6”, the probability that the execution of the mini character suggestion effect F will be determined is relatively high, and the accuracy of the set value suggestion is higher than that of the mini character suggesting effect E.

Further, the mini-character suggestive effect G can be determined only when the set value is "6", and when the mini-character suggestive effect G is executed, it is determined that the set value is "6". That is, in the mini character suggesting effect, if seven mini character images out of eight mini character images are erased and only one mini character image remains, it is determined that the setting value is “6”. If the mini character suggestive effect G is executed, it is determined that the particular set value (in this example, the set value "6"), so the set value suggestion has the highest accuracy.

Further, the mini-character suggestive effect H can be determined only when the super-reach effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and if the mini-character suggestive effect H is executed, the super-reach effect is executed. Is confirmed. That is, in the mini character suggestion effect, if all eight mini character images are erased, it is determined that the super reach effect is executed (it does not suggest the set value).

In step 047IWS606, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the super reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern which is started this time. Whether or not the super reach effect is executed is determined by, for example, checking whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command read in step 047IWS401 of the variable display start setting process includes the super reach effect. Can be determined by. If the variable display is not accompanied by the super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal mini-character suggestion effect determination table for non-super reach shown in FIG. 8-17. Further, in the case of the variable display accompanied by the super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal mini-character suggestion effect determination table for the super reach shown in FIG. 8-18. And CPU120 for production control performs step 047IWS608, performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected mini character suggestion production determination table, and determines the presence and type of mini character suggestion production. Therefore, the execution of the mini character suggestive effect H may be determined only when the super reach effect is executed.

On the other hand, in step 047IWS607, the effect control CPU 120 selects the limiting mini character suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-20. And CPU120 for production control performs step 047IWS608, performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected mini character suggestion production determination table, and determines the presence and type of mini character suggestion production.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, in the limiting mini-character suggestive effect determination table, determination values are not assigned to the mini-character suggestive effect G and the mini-character suggestive effect H. In this example, as described above, the telop suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the set value with relatively high accuracy. On the other hand, among the mini-character suggestive effects, the mini-character suggestive effect G is an effect in which it is confirmed that the setting value is “6”, and is an effect that suggests the setting value with the highest accuracy. Therefore, in this example, when the execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined, by using the limiting mini-character suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. It is configured so that both of the mini character suggestive effects G are not executed.

If the variation display is accompanied by pseudo-repetition (Y in step 047IWS604), the effect control CPU 120 causes the pseudo-repetition counter to count the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-repetition (the number of times including the initial fluctuation and each re-variation). The number of fluctuations of is set (step 047IWS610). For example, in the case of a variation display involving three pseudo-repetitions, 4 (first variation+three re-variations) is set in the pseudo-repetition counter. Further, for example, in the case of a variation display involving one pseudo-repetition, 2 (first variation+one re-variation) is set in the pseudo-repetition number counter.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined in step 047IWS601 (step 047IWS611). If the execution of the telop suggestion effect has not been decided, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo continuous number counter is 1 (step 047IWS612). If the value of the pseudo-repetition counter is 1 (that is, if the final variation of the mini character suggestive effect is to be determined), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence and type of the mini character suggestive effect. The normal mini-character suggestion effect determination table is selected as the table for (step 047IWS613). If the value of the pseudo-repetition counter is not 1 (that is, if the mini character suggestive effect of the change before the final change of the pseudo repeat is determined), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence and type of the mini character suggestive effect. A non-final variation mini character suggestion effect determination table is selected as a table for determination (step 047IWS614). On the other hand, if the execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 selects the limiting mini-character suggestion effect determination table as a table for determining the presence and type of the mini-character suggestion effect (step 047IWS615). ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the mini character suggestion effect determination table selected in steps 047IWS613 to S615, and determines the presence and type of the mini character suggestion effect (step 047IWS616).

In step 047IWS613, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the super reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern which is started this time. Whether or not the super reach effect is executed is determined by, for example, checking whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command read in step 047IWS401 of the variable display start setting process includes the super reach effect. Can be determined by. In addition, in this example, when the super reach effect is executed in the variation display accompanied by the pseudo-relation, the super reach effect is executed in the final variation in the pseudo operation. If the variable display is not accompanied by the super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal mini-character suggestion effect determination table for non-super reach shown in FIG. 8-17. Further, in the case of the variable display accompanied by the super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal mini-character suggestion effect determination table for the super reach shown in FIG. 8-18. And CPU120 for production control performs step 047IWS616, performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected mini character suggestion production determination table, and determines the presence and type of mini character suggestion production. Therefore, only when the super reach effect is executed, the execution of the mini character suggestion effect H may be determined in the final variation of the pseudo-parties.

Further, in step 047IWS614, the effect control CPU 120 selects the non-final variation mini character suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-19. And CPU120 for production control performs step 047IWS616, performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected mini character suggestion production determination table, and determines the presence and type of mini character suggestion production.

As shown in FIG. 8-19, in the non-final variation mini character suggestion effect determination table, no determination value is assigned to the mini character suggestion effect H. Therefore, in this example, even when the super reach effect is executed in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-relation, the mini character suggestion effect H is not executed in the change before the final change, and only in the final change. The mini character suggestive effect H is configured to be executable.

In step 047IWS615, the effect control CPU 120 selects the limiting mini character suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-20. And CPU120 for production control performs step 047IWS616, performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected mini character suggestion production determination table, and determines the presence and type of mini character suggestion production. Therefore, in this example, even in the variable display accompanied by pseudo-relation, when the execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined, the setting value is set by using the limiting mini-character suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-20. Both the telop suggestion effect and the mini-character suggestion effect G having high suggestion accuracy are configured not to be executed.

It should be noted that the determination rate of whether or not to execute the mini-character suggestion effect may be changed according to the jackpot expectation. For example, in a variable display with a high jackpot expectation degree, the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect may be restricted because other notice effects are preferentially executed.

Next, when the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the determined type of the mini-character suggestive effect is more accurate than the type of the mini-character suggestive effect that is determined as the mini-character suggestive effect executed in the previous variation. It is confirmed whether or not it is a mini character suggestion effect (step 047IWS617).

In step 047IWS617, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the mini-character suggestion effect C in the first variation and then decides to execute the mini-character suggestion effect D in the first re-variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines that It is determined that the high-precision mini character suggestive effect has been determined. On the other hand, for example, when the execution of the mini-character suggestion production C is decided in the first variation and then the execution of the mini-character suggestion production B is decided in the first re-variation, the mini-character suggestion production having lower accuracy than the previous variation is decided. It is judged that it did.

When it is determined that the mini-character suggestion effect having lower precision than the previous variation is determined (N in step 047IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 moves to step 047IWS611. That is, when a mini character suggestive effect having a lower accuracy than the previous change is determined, the determination content of the mini character suggestive effect of step 047IWS618 is not stored, and the value of the pseudo consecutive number counter of step 047IWS619 is not updated, but step 047IWS611 The process from S616 to S616 is executed again, the determined contents of the mini character suggestive effect having a lower accuracy than the previous variation are discarded, and the mini character suggestive effect of the same number of variations in the pseudo-player is determined again. With such a configuration, in this example, the pseudo character suggestion is configured so that there is no case where a mini character suggestive effect having a lower precision than the mini character suggestive effect executed in the previous change is executed in a later change. There is.

The processing mode configured so that the mini-character suggestion effect having a lower accuracy than the mini-character suggestion effect executed in the previous change may not be executed in the later change is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, when deciding the mini-character suggestive effect to be executed in the re-fluctuation after the pseudo-players, use a table (kinsoku table) that contains only mini-character suggestive effects of a higher precision than the mini-character suggestive effect determined in the previous variation. It may be configured to determine the presence and type of the mini character suggestive effect.

Further, in this example, when the pseudo-relation is executed, the mini-reach suggestion effect H of the super reach determination is configured to be executable only in the final variation, but the embodiment is not limited thereto. For example, the change before the final change is configured to be able to execute the mini-character suggestive effect H, and the change after executing the mini-character suggestive effect H is configured to be able to execute only the mini-character suggestive effect G having the set value “6” fixed. Good. Even with such a configuration, since the mini-character suggestive effect G is the most accurate effect in the sense that the set value "6" is confirmed, it is later than the mini-character suggestive effect executed in the previous change. It is possible to realize a configuration in which there is no case where a mini-character suggestive production having a low accuracy is executed due to a change in.

When it is determined that the mini-character suggestive effect having a higher precision than the previous variation is determined (Y in step 047IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 determines the determined mini-character suggestive effect when the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect is determined. The information capable of specifying the type is stored in the mini character suggestion effect storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 047IWS618). Although it may be determined in step 047IWS616 that the mini character suggestive effect is not executed in the change, if it is determined that the mini character suggestive effect is not executed, it is determined as Y in step 047IWS617.

In addition, in this example, in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-relation, the mini-character suggestive effect is not always executed at every change in the pseudo-repetition, and the case where the mini-character suggestive effect can be intermittently executed is shown. It is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the mini character suggestive effect is executed in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo string, the mini character suggestive effect may be executed every time the pseudo character is changed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the pseudo consecutive number counter (step 047IWS619). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo consecutive number counter after subtraction is 0 (step 047IWS620). If the value of the pseudo-repetition counter is not 0 (that is, if there is a change in which the mini-character suggestive effect has not yet been decided among the changes in the pseudo-repetition), the process proceeds to step 047IWS611. If the value of the pseudo-repetition counter is 0 (that is, if the mini-character suggestive effect has been determined for all the fluctuations in the pseudo-repetition), the process ends.

(Preliminary notice setting process)
FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect setting process (step 047IWS405). In the notice production setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on a random number using a blackout notice production determination table for determining the presence/absence of a blackout notice production, and determines whether there is a blackout notice production. It is determined (step 047IWS701).

FIG. 8-22(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the blackout notice effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 8-22(A), in the blackout advance notice effect determination table, determination values are assigned for no blackout notice effect and for executing the blackout notice effect, respectively. As shown in FIG. 8-22(A), in this example, it is determined that the blackout notice effect is executed with a probability of 70% in the case of a big hit, and the blackout with a probability of 10% in the case of a big hit. It is decided to execute the notice production.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using a button notification effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the button notification effect, and determines the presence or absence of the button notification effect (step 047IWS702).

FIG. 8-22(B) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the button advance notice effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 8-22(B), in the button advance notice effect determination table, determination values are assigned for no button advance notice effect and for executing the button advance notice effect, respectively. As shown in FIG. 8-22(B), in this example, it is determined that the button advance notice effect is executed with a probability of 70% in the case of a big hit, and the button advance notice effect with a probability of 10% in the case of a big hit. Decide to execute.

When the execution of the blackout advance notice effect or the button advance notice effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 provides the RAM 122 with information that can specify that the execution of the blackout advance notice effect or the button advance notice effect has been determined. The notice production area is stored (step 047IWS703).

In this example, the blackout notice effect is an effect executed when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. However, in this example, as already described, even if the execution of the blackout notice effect is decided, if the setting change suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the blackout notice effect is restricted and the blackout notice effect is limited. May not be executed (see steps 047IWS406 to S408). Further, in this example, as will be described later, even when the execution of the blackout notice effect is limited, when the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-relation is performed, the limited blackout notice effect is reproduced. It may be executed at the beginning of the fluctuation.

(Direction processing during variable display)
8-23 to 8-25 are flowcharts showing the effect display process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 047IWS801) and also subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 047IWS802). When the process timer times out (step 047IWS803), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 047IWS804). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data and the sound number data set next (step 047IWS805).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the mini character suggestion effect (step 047IWS806). In the case of the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-relation, it is confirmed whether or not it is decided to execute the mini-character suggestive effect at the first variation or the re-variation during execution. If it is determined to execute the mini character suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected (specifically, whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input. Is confirmed (step 047IWS807). If the push operation of the push button 31B is detected, the effect control CPU 120 increments the value of the operation number counter by 1 (step 047IWS808).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 1 (step 047IWS809). If the value of the operation number counter is 1, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the first mini-character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS810). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

If the value of the operation number counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 2 (step 047IWS811). If the value of the operation number counter is 2, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini-character suggestive effects B to H are determined as the types of the mini-character suggestive effect (step 047IWS812). If the mini-character suggestive effects B to H have been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the second mini character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS813). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

Even if the second pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the processing of step 047IWS812, if the mini character suggestive effect A is determined, the second mini character image is displayed. Is not erased.

If the value of the operation number counter is not 2, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 3 (step 047IWS814). If the value of the number-of-operations counter is 3, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini character suggestive effects C to H have been determined as the types of the mini character suggestive effect (step 047IWS815). If the mini character suggestive effects C to H have been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the third mini character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS816). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

Even if the third press operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the process of step 047IWS815, if the mini character suggestive effects A to B are determined, the third mini The character image is not deleted.

If the value of the operation number counter is not 3, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 4 (step 047IWS817). If the value of the number-of-operations counter is 4, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini character suggestive effects D to H have been determined as the types of the mini character suggestive effect (step 047IWS818). If the mini-character suggestion effects D to H have been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the fourth mini character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS819). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

Even if the fourth press operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the process of step 047IWS818, if the mini character suggestive effects A to C are determined, the fourth mini The character image is not deleted.

If the value of the operation number counter is not 4, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 5 (step 047IWS820). If the value of the operation number counter is 5, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini character suggestive effects E to H have been determined as the types of the mini character suggestive effect (step 047IWS821). If the mini-character suggestive effects E to H have been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the fifth mini-character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS822). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

Even if the fifth press operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the process of step 047IWS821, if the mini character suggestive effects A to D are determined, the fifth mini The character image is not deleted.

If the value of the operation number counter is not 5, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 6 (step 047IWS823). If the value of the operation number counter is 6, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini character suggestive effects F to H are determined as the types of the mini character suggestive effect (step 047IWS824). If the mini-character suggestive effects F to H have been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the sixth mini character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS825). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

Even if the sixth press operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the process of step 047IWS824, if the mini character suggestive effects A to E are determined, the sixth mini character is produced. The character image is not deleted.

If the value of the operation number counter is not 6, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 7 (step 047IWS826). If the value of the operation number counter is 7, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini character suggestion effect G is determined as the type of the mini character suggestion effect (step 047IWS827). If the mini-character suggestive effect G is determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the seventh mini character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS828). If the mini-character suggestion effect G has not been determined, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini-character suggestion effect H has been determined as the type of the mini-character suggestion effect (step 047IWS829). If the mini-character suggestion effect H is determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to simultaneously erase the seventh and eighth mini character images displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS830). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

Even if the seventh press operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the processing of steps 047IWS827 and S829, if the mini character suggestive effects A to F are determined, the seventh operation is performed. And the eighth mini character image is not deleted.

On the other hand, on the contrary, for example, even when the execution of the mini character suggestion effect G or the mini character suggestion effect H is determined, if the push button 31B is not pressed the seventh time, Y is determined in step 047IWS826. Since the determination is not made, the process does not proceed to steps 047IWS827 to S830, the seventh and eighth mini-character images are not erased, and the two mini-character images remain unchanged.

When the mini character suggestive effect H is determined, for example, even if the operation of the push button 31B for the seventh time is detected, the seventh and eighth mini character images are not deleted, and the push button 31B for the eighth time is further deleted. The seventh and eighth mini character images may be erased at the same time based on the detection of the operation. In this case, when the mini character suggestive effect G is determined, for example, after the seventh mini character image is deleted based on the detection of the operation of the seventh push button 31B, the eighth push button 31B is deleted. Even if the operation is detected, the control may be performed such that the eighth mini character image is not erased and one mini character image remains.

In addition, in this example, the push button 31B is configured to be operable 7 or 8 times at the maximum in the mini character suggestive effect, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the mini character suggestion effect, the push button 31B may be configured to be operable 5 or 6 times at the maximum, or configured to be operable 9 times or more, and various modes are possible.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a fluctuation display accompanied by pseudo-relation and it is the start timing of re-fluctuation (step 047IWS831). Whether or not it is the re-variation start timing can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variation time timer set in step 047IWS415 of the variable display start setting process. If it is not the re-change start timing, the process proceeds to step 047IWS839.

If it is the start timing of the re-fluctuation, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is decided to execute the mini-character suggestive effect at the re-variation to be started this time (step 047IWS832). If the execution of the mini character suggestive effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display eight mini character images (step 047IWS833). In this case, after the re-changing is started, the display of the eight mini-character images is started based on the start timing of the mini-character suggestion effect, and the execution of the mini-character suggestion effect is controlled. Good. Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the operation number counter to 0 (step 047IWS834).

By executing the processing of steps 047IWS831 to S834, in this example, in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-relation, it is possible to newly start the mini-character suggestive effect for each re-change, and the value of the operation number counter is reset. Counting of the number of operations of the push button 31B is started from the state where the number of operations of the push button 31B is 0.

Even when the mini-character suggestive effect is executed for each re-change, the value of the operation number counter may not be reset at the time of re-change. That is, even when the mini character suggestive effect is configured to be executable for each variation of the pseudo-players, the push button 31B is pressed up to 7 times from the start of the variation display of the decorative pattern until the display result is derived and displayed. Alternatively, the detection may be performed up to 8 times.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the notice restriction flag is set (step 047IWS835). If the advance notice restriction flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the advance notice restriction flag (step 047IWS836) and switches to process data according to the blackout advance notice effect (step 047IWS837). Then, CPU 120 for effect control restarts the process timer (step 047IWS838). After that, the process of step 047IWS805 is executed according to the process data switched in step 047IWS837, so that the blackout notice effect is executed at the start of the re-variation.

In this example, as described above, when the setting change suggestion effect is executed when the execution of the blackout notice effect is decided, the execution of the blackout notice effect is restricted (step 047IWS406- By executing the processing of steps 047IWS835 to S838, it is possible to execute the limited blackout notice effect at the start of the re-variation.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the button advance notice effect executing flag indicating that the button advance effect is being executed is set (step 047IWS839). If the button advance notice effect in-execution flag is not set (that is, if the button advance notice effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the button advance notice effect (step 047IWS840). ). Whether or not it is the start timing of the button notice effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 047IWS415 of the variable display start setting process.

If it is the start timing of the button advance notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to perform an operation promotion display for prompting the operation of the push button 31B (in other words, the operation valid period of the push button 31B. Is displayed) is displayed (step 047IWS841). In this case, for example, as the operation prompting display, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as "press the button!" or an image simulating the push button 31B. Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the button advance notice effect in-execution flag (step 047IWS842). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS848.

In this example, in addition to the button advance notice effect, an effect involving the operation of the push button 31 is executed in the mini character suggestive effect as well, but unlike the button advance effect, the mini character suggestive effect is similar to step 047IWS841. The process is not executed and the operation prompting display is not displayed.

If the button advance notice effect in-execution flag is set (that is, if the button advance notice effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 120 detects whether or not the push operation of the push button 31B is detected (specifically, It is confirmed whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input (step 047IWS843). If the push operation of the push button 31B is not detected, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the button notice effect (step 047IWS844). Whether or not it is the end timing of the button advance notice effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 047IWS415 of the variable display start setting process.

When the push operation of the push button 31B is detected (Y in step 047IWS843) or when the end timing of the button notice effect is reached (Y in step 047IWS844), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to give a notice. The display is controlled to be displayed (step 047IWS845). In this case, for example, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as “chance” or “heat” or to display a predetermined character image, and control that suggests the possibility of a big hit. To do. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the operation promotion display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS846). Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the button notice effect executing flag (step 047IWS847).

In addition, in this example, the case where the notice display is displayed based on the operation of the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the button notice effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a button notice that displays a notice display only when the push button 31B is operated not only during the operation valid period but also when the push button 31B is successfully operated at a specific timing during the operation valid period. You may comprise so that performance may be performed. In this case, for example, in the image display device 5, as an operation promotion display, an image simulating the push button 31B is displayed and a gauge display is performed, and the push button 31B is operated at the timing when the gauge level reaches a specific level. In some cases, the notice display may be displayed.

Further, for example, the above configuration may be applied to the setting suggestion effect, and the effect indicating the setting value may be executed only when the push button 31B is successfully operated at a specific timing.

Further, in this example, the mini character suggestion effect and the button advance notice effect are configured to be executable as an effect accompanied by the operation of the push button 31B, but the mini character suggestion effect and the button advance notice effect are simultaneously executed in duplicate. It may be configured as possible. In this case, for example, a single operation of the push button 31B may be configured to execute the effect as if it was operated for both the mini-character suggestion effect and the button notice effect. For example, one operation may erase one mini character image and display a notice display of a button notice effect.

Further, in the present example, the processing of step 047IWS844 is executed, so that even if the push button 31B is not operated when executing the button advance notice effect, the advance notice display is displayed when the operation valid period elapses. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the advance notice may not be displayed unless the push button 31B is operated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3" (step 047IWS849) if the variable time timer has timed out (step 047IWS848), and ends the variable display effect effect process.

(Setting change suggestion notification process)
FIG. 8-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change suggestion notification process (step 047IWS209). In the setting change suggestion notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the initial variation completed flag is set (step 047IWS901). If the first fluctuation completed flag is set (that is, if the fluctuation display has already been executed at least once after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on), the processing is ended. If the first variation completed flag is not set (if the variation display has not been executed even after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the first time), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the initialization flag is set. Is confirmed (step 047IWS902). If the initialization flag has not been set (that is, if the recovery process has been executed), the process is terminated as it is.

If the initialization flag is set (that is, if the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed), the effect control CPU 120 inputs a detection signal from a touch sensor (not shown). It is confirmed whether or not there is any (step 047IWS903). The touch sensor is a sensor that detects that the player is touching the hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30. If the detection signal from the touch sensor is not input, if the detection signal from the touch sensor that terminates the processing as it is is input (that is, if the player is touching the hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30) The effect control CPU 120 performs control to output the setting change suggestion notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 047IWS904). For example, as the setting change suggestion notification sound, control is performed to output a sound such as "Welcome" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this example, as described above, the setting change process may be executed and the setting value may be changed when the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed when the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting change suggestion effect may be executed. Therefore, by executing the processing of steps 047IWS901 to S904, if the setting change suggestion notification sound is output when the variation display has not been executed even once after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1, It is possible to notify that the setting change suggestion effect may be executed in the executed variable display.

In this example, the case where the setting change suggestion notification sound is output as the setting change suggestion notification is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting change suggestion effect is executed by displaying an image that can be displayed only when the initialization process is executed in the image display device 5, or by causing the game effect lamp 9 or the LED to emit light in a predetermined pattern. It may be configured so that the possibility of being notified can be notified.

Next, an effect mode of the setting change suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 8-27 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of a variable display of a normal decorative pattern. Further, FIG. 8-28 and FIG. 8-29 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of the setting change suggestive presentation. Among these, FIG. 8-28 has shown the specific example of the production mode of setting change suggestive production A. Moreover, FIG. 8-29 has shown the specific example of the production mode of setting change suggestion production B. Note that in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-29, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),....

First, with reference to FIG. 8-27, a case will be described in which normal variable display of decorative patterns is executed (when the setting change suggesting effect is not executed). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 8-27(A), in the image display device 5, an initial appearance (in this example, the left middle right decorative pattern 5L, 5C, 5R) , "123" is displayed (see steps 047IWS309 and S311). Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27(A), on the right side of the image display device 5, there is provided a small symbol display area 047IW001 in which three small symbols corresponding to the left middle right decorative symbol are displayed. In the small symbol display area 047IW001, similar to the decorative symbol, the initial appearance of the small symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols “123”) is displayed.

Next, after turning on the power, assume that the start condition for the first variable display is satisfied, and in the example shown in FIG. 8-27, whether the initialization process (RAM clear process) was not executed when the power was turned on, or a setting change suggestion effect was produced. Shall be decided not to execute. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-27(B), in the image display device 5, normal variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative designs 5L, 5C, 5R is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27(B), in the small symbol display area 047IW001, the variable display of the small symbols is started in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbols (see step 047IWS207). Then, when the change time elapses, as shown in FIG. 8-27(C), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5, and the stop symbol of the small symbol (book) is also displayed in the small symbol display area 047IW001. In the example, a combination of the same symbols as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols is derived and displayed.

Next, an effect mode of the setting change suggesting effect A will be described with reference to FIGS. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, as shown in FIG. 8-28(A), in the image display device 5, an initial appearance (in this example, the left middle right decorative pattern 5L, 5C, 5R) , "123" is displayed (see steps 047IWS309 and S311). Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-28(A), on the right side of the image display device 5, there is provided a small symbol display area 047IW001 in which three small symbols corresponding to the left middle and right decorative symbols are displayed. Also, in the small symbol display area 047IW001, similar to the decorative pattern, the initial appearance of the small symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols “123”) is displayed.

Next, after the power is turned on, it is assumed that the condition for starting the first variable display is satisfied, and in the example shown in FIG. 8-28, the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed when the power is turned on and the setting change suggesting effect A is displayed. It shall be decided to execute. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-28(B), the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative patterns 5L, 5C, 5R is not immediately started on the image display device 5, but the left-middle-right decorative pattern 5L is displayed. , 5C, 5R are displayed in a vertically vibrating manner, the setting change suggesting effect A is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 8-28(B), even when the decorative symbol is displayed in a vertically oscillating manner, in the small symbol display area 047IW001, the variable display of the three small symbols is the same as in the normal time. It is started (see step 047IWS207).

Next, after the setting change suggesting effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-28(C), the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative designs 5L, 5C, 5R is started on the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-28(C), the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed in the small symbol display area 047IW001 (see step 047IWS207). Then, when the change time elapses, as shown in FIG. 8-28(D), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5, and the stop symbol of the small symbol is also displayed in the small symbol display area 047IW001 (book. In the example, a combination of the same symbols as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols is derived and displayed.

Next, an effect mode of the setting change suggesting effect B will be described with reference to FIGS. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 8-29(A), in the image display device 5, an initial appearance (in this example, the left middle right decorative patterns 5L, 5C, 5R) , "123" is displayed (see steps 047IWS309 and S311). Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-29(A), on the right side of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 047IW001 in which three small symbols corresponding to the left middle right decorative symbol are displayed is provided. In the small symbol display area 047IW001, similar to the decorative symbol, the initial appearance of the small symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols “123”) is displayed.

Next, after the power is turned on, it is assumed that the condition for starting the first variable display is satisfied, and in the example shown in FIG. 8-29, the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed when the power is turned on and the setting change suggestion effect B is displayed. It shall be decided to carry out. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-29(B), the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative designs 5L, 5C, 5R is not immediately started on the image display device 5, but the left-middle-right decorative pattern 5L is displayed. , 5C and 5R are vertically vibrated and displayed, the setting change suggestion effect B is executed. Further, when the setting change suggesting effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-29(B), the effect image 047IW002 is displayed around the left, middle, and right decorative designs 5L, 5C, 5R that are vibrated vertically. Is displayed. However, as shown in FIG. 8-29(B), even when the decorative design is vibratingly displayed in the vertical direction, in the small design display area 047IW001, the variable display of the three small designs is displayed as in the normal time. It is started (see step 047IWS207).

Next, after the setting change suggesting effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-29(C), the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative designs 5L, 5C, 5R is started on the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-29(C), the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed in the small symbol display area 047IW001 (see step 047IWS207). Then, when the change time elapses, as shown in FIG. 8-29(D), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the image display device 5, and the stop symbol of the small symbol is also displayed in the small symbol display area 047IW001 (book. In the example, a combination of the same symbols as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols is derived and displayed.

Next, a description will be given of a production mode of the mini character suggestive production. FIG. 8-30 and FIG. 8-31 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of the mini character suggestive presentation. 8-30 and 8-31, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),....

As shown in FIG. 8-30(A), it is assumed that the variable display of the left middle right decorative symbols 5L, 5C, 5R is started and the variable display of the small symbols is started in the small symbol display area 047IW001. When it is decided to execute the mini character suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B), the display of eight mini character images 047IW003 is started on the image display device 5 (see step 047IWS410), and the mini character suggestion is performed. Start execution of production. In this example, a case in which the mini-character suggestive effect G or the mini-character suggestive effect H is determined as the type of the mini-character suggestive effect will be described. Further, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (B) and thereafter, a case where the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper left end portion of the image display device 5 is shown during execution of the mini character suggestive effect. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B) and thereafter, the mini-character suggestion effect is an effect accompanied by a push operation by the push button 31B, but as shown in FIG. However, the operation prompting display is not displayed.

Next, when the push button 31B is pressed for the first time during execution of the mini character suggestion effect, the first mini character displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-30C. The image 047IW003 is deleted (see step 047IWS810). After that, each time the push button 31B is operated, the mini character images 047IW003 are deleted one by one (see steps 047IWS813, S816, S819, S822), and when the sixth push button 31B is pressed, As shown in FIG. 8-30(D), the sixth mini character image 047IW003 displayed on the image display device 5 is erased (see step 047IWS825).

Next, when the push button 31B is pressed the seventh time during execution of the mini-character suggestion effect, if execution of the mini-character suggestion effect G is decided, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (E1). , The seventh mini character image 047IW003 displayed on the image display device 5 is erased (see step 047IWS828), and only one mini character image 047IW003 is displayed, and the setting value is “6”. Is determined (see FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20).

On the other hand, if the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect H is decided when the push button 31B is pressed for the seventh time during the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect, it is shown in FIG. 8-31 (E2). As described above, the seventh and eighth mini character images 047IW003 displayed on the image display device 5 are simultaneously erased (see step 047IWS830), and all the mini character images 047IW003 are erased, resulting in the super reach effect. Is determined to be executed (see FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20).

8-30 and 8-31 show the case where the mini character suggestion effect G or the mini character suggestion effect H is executed, for example, when the mini character suggestion effect F is executed, FIG. 31(E1) and (E2), even if the push button 31B is pressed the seventh time, the seventh and eighth mini character images 047IW003 are not erased, and FIG. 8-30(D). As shown in, the two mini character images 047IW003 remain displayed and do not change.

On the contrary, even if the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect G or the mini-character suggestive effect H is determined, if the push button 31B is not pressed the seventh time, the seventh or eighth The mini character image 047IW003 is not erased, and the state in which two mini character images 047IW003 are displayed remains unchanged as shown in FIG. 8-30(D).

As described above, according to the feature part 047IW, the decoration identification information (for example, the decorative pattern) is variably displayed, and the advantageous state advantageous for the player according to the display result of the variably displayed (for example, the big hit game). State) and can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set value “1” to set value “6”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. Further, in association with the variable display of the decoration identification information, the variable display of the special identification information (for example, small pattern) can be executed. In addition, when the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, the operation mode of the decoration identification information is a special mode different from the normal operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. By setting the decorative patterns 5L, 5C, and 5R to vibrate in the vertical direction), it is possible to execute a setting-related effect (for example, a setting change suggestion effect) that gives a suggestion related to the setting. In addition, regardless of whether or not the operation mode of the decoration identification information is the special mode, the variable display of the special identification information is executed by the same operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. Even in the case where the symbols are oscillated in the vertical direction, the variable display of the three small symbols is started in the small symbol display area 047IW001 as in the normal time). Therefore, it is possible to secure the visibility of the special identification information and prevent the effect of the setting-related effect from being lowered. For example, when the decorative design is vibrated vertically and the setting change suggestion effect is executed, if the small design is also vibrated vertically in a similar manner, the visibility of the small design is hindered. I will end up. Therefore, in the characteristic part 047IW, while the decorative design is vibratingly displayed in the up-down direction, the small design is displayed in the same variable manner as in the normal state, thereby ensuring the visibility of the small design and suggesting a setting change. I try not to reduce the performance effect of the performance.

In this example, a case where the decorative pattern is vibrated and displayed in the vertical direction is shown as a special mode, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a special mode, the decorative design may be displayed in an enlarged manner, an effect image may be displayed around the decorative design, or the effect of the character of the decorative design may be performed. In this way, it may be possible to indicate the possibility that the setting value has been changed by displaying the decorative design in some form in a manner different from the normal manner.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, the image display means (for example, the image display device 5) capable of displaying the image is provided. Then, the setting display effect is executed in the image display means. Therefore, the player can be focused on the image display means.

Further, according to the feature part 047IW, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, blackout notice effect) in association with the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information. Further, when the operation mode of the decoration identification information is the special mode, the execution of the specific effect is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the operation of the decoration identification information according to the special mode.

In this example, the blackout notice effect is executed as the specific effect, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect such that the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed at the start of the variation, or an effect image is displayed around the decorative pattern. In this way, as a specific effect, if it is executed at the same time, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it difficult to see the vibration display in the vertical direction of the decorative pattern by some form.

Further, as a specific effect, not only an effect that hinders the visibility of the decorative pattern, for example, when the fluctuation starts, the lamp or LED of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on or blinks to flash, or a notification sound of a predetermined volume is output. It may be configured to execute a presentation effect. In this way, as the specific effect, an effect in which the attention is paid to something other than the decorative pattern may be executed.

In addition, even when the effect is executed at the start of fluctuation, the effect that does not impair the visibility of the decorative pattern or the effect with a low volume is executed, even when the setting change suggesting effect is executed at the same time. Alternatively, the execution of the effect may not be limited.

Even when the setting change suggesting effect is executed at the start of fluctuation, the effect to be executed at a timing other than the start of fluctuation (for example, during high speed fluctuation or during reach) is not restricted. You may comprise.

Further, in this example, when both the execution of the setting change suggesting effect and the execution of the blackout notice effect are determined, a case is shown in which the blackout notice effect is restricted not to be executed at the start of the fluctuation. It is not limited to such a mode. For example, the execution rate of the blackout advance notice effect may be restricted in some form, such as by reducing the execution rate of the blackout notice effect.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, it is possible to execute the re-variable display for a predetermined number of times, after the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display of the decoration identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. (For example, pseudo-run can be performed). Further, after the execution of the specific effect is limited, the specific effect can be executed when the re-variable display is started. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the specific effect is not executed.

Further, according to the feature part 047IW, it is possible to execute the notification effect (for example, the setting change suggestion notification) that notifies that the setting related effect may be executed. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the decoration identification information in advance.

Further, according to the feature part 047IW, when the setting value is set to a specific setting value or more (for example, the setting value “4” or more), the operation mode of the decoration identification information is a special mode different from the special mode. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-29(B), the effect image 047IW002 is displayed around the left-middle-right decorative designs 5L, 5C, and 5R that are vibrated in the vertical direction.) (For example, setting change suggestion effect B) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the decoration identification information operates according to the special mode.

In addition, in this example, the case where the effect image 047IW002 is displayed around the decorative patterns 5L, 5C, and 5R on the left, middle, and right sides as a special mode is shown, but the invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a special mode, the decorative pattern is vibrated with a vibration width larger than that of the special mode, or the decorative pattern is vibrated in a direction different from the special mode (for example, in the left-right direction), which is different from the special mode. You may comprise so that a decorative design may be displayed in a vibration mode.

Further, for example, the setting change suggesting effect B may be executed when the setting value is set to "6". In this case, if the setting value is set to “6”, the setting change suggestion effect B may be executed with a probability of 100%, or the setting change suggestion effect B may be executed with a predetermined probability by the lottery process. It may be configured to execute. Further, for example, the setting change suggestion effect B may be executed only when a big hit occurs in the first variation display after turning on the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, various modes can be considered as the mode of executing the setting change suggesting effect B.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1") that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, big hit gaming state) and have different degrees of advantage for the player ~ Setting value "6") can be set. Further, a detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player is provided, and based on the detection by the detection means, a predetermined effect (for example, a mini character Suggestive production) can be executed. In addition, the effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode (for example, a mini character suggestive effect H) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled, and a specific mode (for example, a mini character suggestive effect A to G) that suggests a set value. Including the specific mode, the first suggestive mode (for example, the mini character suggestive productions A to F) that suggests which of the plurality of setting values is set, and the specific setting value (for example, the mini character suggestion effects A to F). , A second suggestion mode (for example, a mini character suggestive effect G) that suggests that the set value is set to “6”). Further, when the first condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated once to six times) is established based on the detection by the detection means, the predetermined effect can be executed according to the first suggestion mode. When the second condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated seven times) is established based on the detection by the detection means after the above condition is established, the predetermined effect can be executed by the second suggestion mode. Further, when the second condition is satisfied while the predetermined condition (for example, the execution of the mini character suggestive effect H is determined) is satisfied, the predetermined effect (for example, the mini character suggestive effect H) can be executed by the special mode. Is. Therefore, even in a situation where the highly accurate predetermined effect is not executed, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect that can enhance the interest.

In this example, a predetermined effect (in this example, a mini-character suggestion effect) is executed with a plurality of push button 31B operations, and the first push button 31B is operated 1 to 6 times. The case where the second condition is satisfied based on the condition being satisfied and the push button 31B being operated seven times has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute an effect involving a long press operation of the push button 31B in the predetermined effect. In this case, for example, if the push button 31B is continuously pressed for the first period (for example, 10 seconds), the first condition is satisfied, and the second period (for example, 20 seconds) longer than the first period is continued. The second condition may be satisfied if the button is pressed down.

Further, in the present example, a case has been described in which a predetermined effect (in this example, a mini character suggestion effect) is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if the predetermined effect is executed based on the operation of the stick controller 31A, or if the cross key or the jog dial is provided, the predetermined effect is executed based on the operation of the cross key or the jog dial. It may be configured. Further, for example, in the case where the infrared sensor or the optical sensor is provided, the predetermined effect may be executed based on the detection of the movement of the player by the infrared sensor or the optical sensor. It is sufficient that the action (operation) of the player is detected in some form and the predetermined effect is executed.

Further, in this example, the case where the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect H is decided (that is, the setting value is not suggested in the mini-character suggestive effect) is shown as the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied. I can't stop. For example, if a predetermined condition is satisfied when attention is paid to a notice effect other than the mini-character suggestion effect, the mini-character suggestion effect may be executed in a mode without suggesting the set value.

Further, in this example, as a case of executing the predetermined effect in a special mode (a mode that does not involve suggestion of which set value), a case of executing the mini character suggestion effect H of the super reach effect confirmation is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, various modes are conceivable as the predetermined effect that is executed in a mode that does not involve suggestion of which set value, such as executing a pseudo-consecutive confirmation, a big hit determination, and an effect in which a change in active display is determined.

In addition, according to the characteristic unit 047IW, it is possible to execute an effective period notification effect (for example, operation promotion display) that notifies that the detection by the detection unit is the effective detection effective period (for example, operation effective period). Also, regarding the detection effective period of the predetermined effect, the effective period notification effect is not executed (for example, in the mini character suggestion effect, the operation promotion display is not displayed). Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who has performed the operation by noticing that it is the detection effective period of the predetermined effect.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 047IW, after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control to the special state (for example, the probability change state) that is easily controlled to the advantageous state. In addition, the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted while being controlled to the special state (for example, the mini-character suggestion effect can be executed only when the probability change state is not in effect). Therefore, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on being controlled in the special state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, it is possible to execute the re-variable display a predetermined number of times after the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived and displayed and then the variable display is performed again (for example, , It is possible to run pseudo-ream). Further, for each re-variable display, it is possible to initialize the condition established based on the detection by the detecting means including the first condition and the second condition (for example, the value of the operation number counter is reset every re-variation). .. Therefore, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived and displayed, and the interest for the predetermined effect can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, it is possible to execute the re-variable display a predetermined number of times after the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived and displayed and then the variable display is performed again (for example, , It is possible to run pseudo-ream). Further, the predetermined effect according to the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect according to the second suggestion mode can be executed at different ratios according to the number of times of the re-variable display (for example, in the pseudo-player, the mini character executed by the previous change). There is no case where a mini character suggestive effect with low accuracy is executed due to a change after the suggestive effect). Therefore, it is possible to give the motive to the player to perform an operation for each revariable display.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, it is possible to execute a special effect (for example, telop suggestion effect) that suggests which setting value and has a mode different from the predetermined effect. Further, in the variable display in which the special effect is executed, execution of at least the predetermined effect according to the second suggestion mode is restricted (see FIG. 8-20). Therefore, it is possible to restrict execution of an effect with an excessively high precision as an effect that suggests which set value. For example, if the highly accurate setting suggestion effect (in this example, the telop suggestion effect and the mini character suggestion effect G) are executed in duplicate, the player may have an expectation that the setting is excessively high. Therefore, we try to limit such situations.

In this example, the case where the telop suggestive effect is executed as the special effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a special effect, a setting suggestion effect in which a predetermined character appears may be executed, or a setting suggestion effect in which a puzzle is completed may be executed, which is relatively high in some form. Anything that executes the setting suggestion effect may be used.

Further, in this example, the case where the control is performed so as not to execute the high-precision setting suggestion effect in duplicate is not limited to such a mode, but, for example, conversely, a special effect (for example, a telop suggestion effect). Is configured to execute a highly accurate mini-character suggestive effect (mini-character suggestive effect G in this example) at a high rate and to increase the player's expectation for a high set value. Good.

In addition to the processing mode shown in this example, for example, the telop suggestion effect and the mini-character suggestion effect may be overlapped in the first place by selectively determining the telop suggestion effect and the mini-character suggestion effect. It may be configured so that it does not exist.

Further, in this example, the case where the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect G is restricted when the execution of the telop suggestive effect is determined is shown. Conversely, when the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect G is determined, the execution of the telop suggestive effect is executed. May be limited.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1") that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, big hit gaming state) and have different degrees of advantage for the player ~ Setting value "6") can be set. Further, a detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player is provided, and based on the detection by the detection means, a predetermined effect (for example, a mini character Suggestive production) can be executed. In addition, it is determined whether or not a special condition (for example, that the execution of the mini character suggestive effect G has been decided) is satisfied, and the effect mode of the predetermined effect is one of a plurality of set values. A first suggestive mode (for example, a mini character suggestive effect A to F) to suggest, and a second suggestive mode to suggest that a specific setting value (for example, a setting value “6”) is set among a plurality of setting values. (For example, a mini character suggestive effect G) is included. Further, when the first condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated 1 to 6 times) is satisfied based on the detection by the detection unit, the predetermined effect can be executed by the first suggestion mode and the determination unit When it is determined that the special condition is satisfied by the case where the second condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated seven times) is satisfied based on the detection by the detection unit after the first condition is satisfied. The predetermined effect can be executed by the second suggestion mode. Further, when the determination means determines that the special condition is satisfied, if the first condition is satisfied but the second condition is not satisfied, the predetermined effect is executed according to the first suggestive aspect (for example, Even if the execution of the mini character suggestive effect G is decided, unless the seventh push button 31B is pressed, the seventh mini character image 047IW003 is not deleted, and the mini character image is not deleted. 047IW003 is still displayed and remains unchanged.) Therefore, a predetermined effect can be executed according to the game situation. That is, according to the game situation, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect so that the effect does not appear to be racing.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

In addition, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the later-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be understood that the above-described embodiments disclosed herein and the embodiments described later are examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description, but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

In addition, as the gaming machine of the present invention, a plurality of set values (for example, a set value "1" that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) and have different degrees of advantage to the player) Based on the detection means (for example, the push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and the detection means. Then, a predetermined effect (for example, steps 047 IWS409 to S411, S806 to S834 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a mini character suggestion effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes. (A part to be executed), and a determination means for determining whether or not a special condition (for example, having decided to execute the mini character suggestion effect G) is satisfied (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 which executes step 047IWS827). And a first suggestion mode (for example, a mini character suggestive effect A to F) that suggests which setting value is set among the plurality of setting values, and a specific one of the plurality of setting values. And a second suggestion mode (for example, a mini character suggestive effect G) that suggests that the preset value is set to the set value (for example, the set value “6”), and the predetermined effect executing means is based on the detection by the detecting means. When one condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated once to six times) is satisfied, the predetermined effect can be executed in the first suggestion mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 047IWS809 to S825). At the same time, the second condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated seven times) based on the detection by the detection unit after the first condition is satisfied when the determination unit determines that the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect according to the second suggestion mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 047IWS826 to S828), and the determining means determines that the special condition is satisfied. If the first condition is satisfied but the second condition is not satisfied, the predetermined effect can be executed by the first suggestion mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 047IWS826). Thus, even if the execution of the mini character suggestive effect G is decided, if the seventh push button 31B is not pressed, the seventh mini character image 047IW003 is displayed. It is not erased and the mini character image 047IW003 remains displayed in two states.),
further,
A control unit capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components (for example, a microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and memory contents can be retained even when power supply to a gaming machine is stopped, and information regarding the plurality of electronic components can be stored. Storage means (for example, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D), and the control means writes the information in the storage means when the event occurrence condition corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied. Processing (for example, writing processing by the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10) can be executed, and the storage unit corresponds to the storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and the second generation condition. The storage area in which the second information is written is provided as one continuous area (for example, the backup storage area 41AKA1 including the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13), and the first generation condition and the second generation condition are satisfied. In this case, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition is being executed, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition is not executed (for example, write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is ON). A game machine is mentioned. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect in accordance with the game situation. Further, it becomes possible to manage information appropriately.

Further, the number of executions of the predetermined effect may be stored in the storage means. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the execution frequency of the predetermined effect. Further, the first suggestive aspect and the second suggestive aspect may be stored separately. By doing so, it becomes possible to more precisely grasp the execution frequency of the effect.

Further, in the case of storing the number of times the special condition is satisfied and the number of times the predetermined performance is executed, if the first generation condition or the second generation condition is satisfied and the writing process is executed, the number of times the special condition is satisfied or the predetermined performance is performed. The number of times of execution may not be stored, or may be delayed and stored. By doing so, it becomes possible to reduce the control load of the control means.

Further, a plurality of types of the first condition and the second condition may be set, and the condition for executing the set value suggestion according to the first suggestive aspect and the second suggestive aspect may be changed. For example, the number of push button 31B operations required to satisfy the second condition is selected from among 3 to 7 times by lottery, etc., and first in the mini-character suggestion effect (FIG. 8-30, FIG. 8-31). The number of displayed mini-character images (see FIG. 8-30(B)) is reflected in the selection result (for example, among 4 to 8 bodies, 4 bodies if the number of operations is 3 times, 8 bodies if the number of operations is 7 times). By changing the selection ratio of the required number of operations depending on the set value that is set, the more necessary the set value that is set for the player, the more necessary the operation for establishing the second condition. The number of times may be reduced (the number of mini-character images initially displayed may be reduced). By doing so, when the number of operations required to satisfy the second condition is small (when the number of mini-character images displayed first is small), the set value set is advantageous for the player. Since it can be expected that the number of required operations is constant, the interest in the game is improved and the player's willingness to participate in the operation (operation of the push button 31B) can be improved.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that can improve interest and manage information appropriately,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
Control means capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
And a storage unit capable of retaining stored contents even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and storing information regarding the plurality of electronic components (for example, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D).
The control unit executes a writing process (for example, a writing process by the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10) for writing the information in the storage unit when an event occurrence condition corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied. Is possible,
In the storage means, a storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and a storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written are continuous (for example, a backup storage area). 41 AKA11 to 41 AKA13) as a backup storage unit 41 AKA1), and when the information corresponding to one of the conditions is executed when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied, the other A gaming machine that does not execute the process of writing information corresponding to the condition (for example, write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on) is included. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)

FIG. 9 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 901 according to this embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes a gaming board 902 and a gaming machine frame 903. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame that rotatably supports the gaming machine frame 903. The game board 902 is a gauge board that constitutes a game board surface. The gaming machine frame 903 is an underframe for fixing the gaming board 902. On the game board 902, a game area surrounded by a guide rail or the like is formed. The game ball (game medium) launched from the launch device passes through the launch passage and is driven into the game area. A glass door frame having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 903.

At a predetermined position of the game board 902, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, an image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, A normal symbol display 9020, a first holding display 9025A, a second holding display 9025B, a universal drawing holding display 9025C, a passage gate 9041 and the like are provided. In addition, a windmill, a large number of obstacle nails, a general winning opening, an outlet, and the like may be provided on the game board surface in the game area. A game effect lamp 90909 is provided in the periphery of the game area. Speakers 908L and 908R are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) is provided. The hit ball operation handle is operated by a player or the like to shoot the game ball toward the game area, and the resilience of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount (rotation amount). At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the game area, an upper plate (hit ball supply plate) that holds (reserves) the game balls and a lower plate (remains) that holds (reserves) surplus balls and the like from the upper plate. A ball storage dish) is provided. A stick controller 9031A is attached to a member forming the lower plate, and a push button 9031B is provided to a member forming the upper plate.

On the screens of the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the image display device 905, variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is performed. These variable displays are based on the occurrence of the first start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening formed on the normal winning ball device 906A, or on the normal variable winning ball device 906B. Execution is possible based on the occurrence of the second start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the formed second starting winning opening. The first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are respectively configured by using, for example, 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), etc., and are identified in the special symbol game as an example of the variable display game. Special symbols (special symbols) that are information (special identification information) are variably displayed (variably displayed). The image display device 905 is configured by using, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 905, the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 904A in the special symbol game and the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B (the second symbol) Corresponding to each variable display of 2 special symbol or 2nd special symbol), the decorative symbol which is the identification information (decorative identification information) is variable in the decorative symbol display area which is a plurality of variable display parts such as three. Is displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game. As an example, decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" are arranged on the screen of the image display device 905.

A reserved storage display area 905H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 905. In the hold storage display area 905H, a hold display is displayed that allows a variable display hold number (special figure hold storage number) corresponding to the special figure game to be specified. The hold display may be any display that can be displayed in correspondence with the hold storage of information regarding variable display. The hold display using the first hold display 9025A and the second hold display 9025B may be performed together with the hold storage display area 905H or instead of the hold storage display area 905H.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of various substrates and peripheral devices. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a lamp output board 9013, a backup memory board 9014, and an effect data memory board 9016 as shown in FIG. In addition, a relay board 9015, a performance control relay board 9017, an audio output board 9018, a driver board 9019, etc. are also mounted. Further, various boards such as a power board, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board may be mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components are mounted, but also electric components are mounted (mounted) on electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including an electronic circuit mounting board configured as described above.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is possible to supply electric power from an AC power supply, which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), to electric components including various control boards such as a main board 9011 and a production control board 9012 by a power supply board. Has been done. The power supply board includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V or direct current 5V), and the like. I have it. The power supply voltage generated by the power supply board may be supplied to the main board 9011, the effect control board 9012, etc. via the drawer relay board.

On the main board 9011, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, etc. are mounted. In the main board 9011, signals fetched from various detection switches such as a gate switch 9021, a starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 9022A and second starting opening switch 9022B), and a count switch 9023 are passed through a switch circuit 90110. It is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100. The gate switch 9021 detects a game ball (gate passing ball) that has passed through the passing gate 9041. Based on the detection of the gate passing sphere by the gate switch 9021, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed by the normal symbol display 9020. The first starting opening switch 9022A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) at the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A. The second starting port switch 9022B detects a game ball that has passed (entered) at the second starting winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The count switch 9023 detects a game ball that has passed (entered) at the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907. When a game ball that has passed through various winning openings such as a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a big winning opening is detected, the number of prize balls determined in advance corresponding to each winning opening As a game ball is paid out.

On the main board 9011, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 is transmitted to a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory and a solenoid 9082 for a special winning opening door via a solenoid circuit 90111. Solenoid 9081 for the normal electric auditors product, a state in which the game ball does not easily pass (or does not pass) and a state in which it easily passes (or passes) the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. It can be changed to and. The solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door allows the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 907 to be changed between a state in which the game ball cannot pass and a state in which it can pass. From the main board 9011, a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display device 9020, etc. is transmitted.

A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 90101 for storing a game control program and fixed data, and a RAM 90102 for providing a game control work area. , A CPU 90103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, a random number circuit 90104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 90103, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 90105. Prepared for. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011, various random number values used to control the progress of the game are controlled by, for example, a random number circuit 90104 or a game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. The numerical data shown is counted (generated) so that it can be updated. The random number used to control the progress of the game is also called a game random number.

On the main board 9011, a setting key 9051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a setting functioning as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a big hit in the setting change state The changeover switch 9052 is connected. The setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 may be installed at a predetermined position of the main board 9011, or may be attached to the outside of the main board 9011 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board. The setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 903 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the staff in possession can operate it. Since the setting key 9051 requires key operation, only the staff having a key for operating the setting key 9051 can operate among the staff in the game arcade. The setting key 9051 is a switch that can be turned on and off by a predetermined key operation, and is also a switch that can perform an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation.

Various sensors such as a door opening sensor 909090 that detects opening of a glass door frame that covers the front surface of the game board 902 so as to be openable and closable are connected to the main board 9011, and based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function of determining the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors). The reset signal, the power-off signal, and the clear signal from the power supply board are taken into the switch circuit 90110 of the main board 9011 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100. A display monitor 9029 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 9011, and a display changeover switch 9030 is arranged beside the display monitor 9029. The display monitor 9029 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 9029 and the display changeover switch 9030 are arranged in front of the main board 9011 when the back side of the game board 902 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 903 opened.

The main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) is provided with respective winning openings (first big winning opening, second big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter, "entry area". (Also referred to as “”), the number of game balls entering the game is totaled, and various winning information such as the continuous ratio and the winning combination is displayed on the display monitor 9029. By displaying such prize information, it is possible to confirm various prize information such as the consecutive ratio and the winning combination after being installed in the game hall. On the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is usual that the gaming board surface is designed so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. Further, when performing the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 901 is installed, whether or not the adjustment has been made, what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, the game ball enters the general winning opening as often as designed. Is confirmed (verified). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of the adjustment after installation and the contents.

The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 9011, and based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L, 908R. , Game effect lamp 909, staging motor 9060, staging LED 9061, and other staging devices, various circuits for controlling staging operations by various staging electric parts are mounted. The effect control board 9012 displays an image on the image display device 905, outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, lights the light emitting members of the game effect lamp 909 and the effect LED 9061, and moves the effect motor 9060. It is provided with a function of determining control contents for causing the electric parts for performance to execute a predetermined performance operation, such as the driving operation of. On the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 10, electronic components such as an effect control microcomputer 90120, an external ROM 90121, and an external RAM 90121 are mounted.

The effect control board 9012 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, wiring for transmitting an illumination signal to the lamp output board 9013, and a backup memory board 9014 for backup. Wiring for transmitting a control signal and the like, wiring for transmitting an effect data signal to and from the effect data memory board 9016 are connected. Wirings for transmitting various signals are also connected to the sound output board 9018 and the driver board 9019 via the effect control relay board 9017. The information signal transmitted to the audio output board 9018 may include an audio signal (sound effect signal) that specifies audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The information signal transmitted to the driver board 9019 may include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the production movable member by driving the production motor 9060. The information signal transmitted to the driver board 9019 may include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting the effect LED 9061. Wiring for receiving the motion detection signal may be connected to the effect control board 9012. The motion detection signal may include a detection signal indicating that the motion of the player using the stick controller 9031A has been detected. The motion detection signal may include a detection signal indicating that the motion of the player using the push button 9031B has been detected.

The lamp output board 9013 is a lamp output board provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and a driver IC or the like that supplies a driving current to the game effect lamp 909 or the like in accordance with an illumination signal from the effect control board 9012. Is installed. The backup memory board 9014 is a board for storing backup data that is provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is capable of executing backup data write processing and read processing in accordance with a backup control signal from the effect control board 9012. It is configured. In the backup data writing process, the backup data is written and stored in the backup data memory. In the backup data reading process, the backup data stored in the backup data memory is read and transmitted to the effect control board 9012 or the like. The effect data memory board 9016 is a board for effect data storage provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is configured to be able to execute effect data read processing in accordance with effect data control signals from the effect control board 9012. ing. In the effect data read processing, the effect data stored in the effect data memory is read and transmitted to the effect control board 9012 or the like. An effect data memory capable of storing effect data is mounted on the effect data memory board 9016. In the effect data memory, a storage area for storing various kinds of image data showing a display image on the image display device 905, a storage area for storing various kinds of sound data showing sounds output from the speakers 908L, 908R, and an effect motor 9060. A storage area for storing various motor data indicating the drive control content of, a storage area for storing various light emission data indicating the lighting control content of the game effect lamp 909 and the effect LED 9061, and the like may be provided in advance. The effect data memory may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory such as a NAND ROM, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. What is necessary is just to be comprised.

The effect control relay board 9017 is installed in a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 902, and relays various signals transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the sound output board 9018 and the driver board 9019. The back pack may be attached to a central portion on the back surface side of the game board 902, and an opening facing the image display device 905 may be formed in the center thereof. The back pack may be provided so as to cover a part or all of the main board 9011, the lamp output board 9013, the audio output board 9018, and the driver board 9019 from the rear side. An effect control board box in which a part or all of the effect control board 9012, the backup memory board 9014, and the effect data memory board 9016 are housed may be attached to the rear surface side of the back pack. The main board 9011 may be housed in a board case together with a setting key 9051 and a setting changeover switch 9052 which can be operated by an attendant of a game hall or the like. In this case, the display monitor 9029 and the display changeover switch 9030 arranged on the main board 9011 may be housed in the board case. The setting key 9051, the setting changeover switch 9052, and the display changeover switch 9030 may be exposed through an opening formed on the back surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case. The sound output board 9018 is a board for sound output provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, which are sound output devices, according to the sound signal from the effect control board 9012. Various circuits are installed. The driver board 9019 is a drive control board provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on the information signal from the effect control board 9012, outputs a drive signal of the effect motor 9060 and a lighting signal of the effect LED 9061. A driver IC to be supplied is mounted.

A security cover may be attached to cover the board case housing the setting key 9051 and the setting switch 9052 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed. In the state where the gaming machine frame 903 is closed, the board case containing the setting keys 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 is covered with a security cover from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Accordingly, the setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 become inoperable when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed. In the state where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the security cover may be separated from the substrate case, so that the operation of the setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 may be permitted. The setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 when the gaming machine frame 903 is closed. Further, by covering the board case including the setting key 9051 and the setting changeover switch 9052 with the security cover, it is possible to prevent a problem that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is operated from the inside of the gaming island or the like.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The production control command may include a display control command. The display control command is used to control the image display operation in the image display device 905. The production control command may include a voice control command. The voice control command is used to control the voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The production control command may include a lighting control command. The lighting control command is used to control the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 909 and the effect LED 9061. The movable control command is used to control the operation of the movable effect member by the driving force of the effect motor 9060. Each of these commands may separately configure an effect control command, or a combination of some or all of them may configure an effect control command.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a program for game control to perform a control operation, and numerical data that indicates a random number value is updated independently of the CPU 90103. A random number circuit 90104 for performing and an I/O (Input/Output port) 90105 are provided. Note that the random number circuit 90104 is not limited to being built in the game control microcomputer 90100, and may be external to the game control microcomputer 90100.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the fixed data reading operation, the CPU 90103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and the CPU 90103 stores various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. Variable data read operation to read out, CPU 90103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I/O 90105, CPU 90103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I/O 90105 The transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The random number circuit 90104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data that forms a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 90101, table data forming a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns are configured. Table data etc. to be stored are stored.

FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the production control board 9012. Of the electronic components such as the rendering control microcomputer 90120, the external ROM 90121, and the external RAM 90122 mounted on the rendering control board 9012, some or all of the components can be attached/detached by inserting/removing connector pins into/from the connector socket. The other components may be mounted so as to be mountable by soldering or the like. On the production control board 9012, connectors 90150 to 90156 are mounted together with these electronic components. The production control microcomputer 90120 includes a CPU 90131, an internal ROM 90132, an internal RAM 90133, a watchdog timer 90134, a timer circuit 90135, an interrupt controller 90136, a serial communication circuit 90137, a clock circuit 90138, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 90140, and a sound processing circuit. 90141, the lamp control circuit 90142, the motor control circuit 90143, etc. are comprised including several electronic components. The effect control microcomputer 90120 may be any effect control microprocessor that integrates these electronic components. CPU90131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. The internal ROM 90132 fixedly stores a basic program of control processing executed by the CPU 90131 such as firmware, system setting data unique to the effect control microcomputer 90120, and the like. The internal RAM 90133 provides a work area for the CPU 90131. The watchdog timer 90134 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of a built-in register. When the measurement time exceeds the monitoring time (timeout time) and a time-out occurs, a time-out signal becomes a time-out signal. Generate a signal. The CPU 90131 periodically clears and restarts the watchdog timer 90134. When the processing of the CPU 90131 is delayed due to some failure or the like and the watchdog timer 90134 cannot be cleared and the measurement time exceeds the monitoring time, a timeout signal is generated and the processing by the CPU 90131 is reset.

The timer circuit 90135 is, for example, a circuit in which an 8-bit programmable counter is built in for 4 channels (CH0 to CH3) and is a circuit capable of generating a real-time interrupt and measuring time. The timer circuit 90135 starts counting down at a predetermined cycle from a count initial value preset for each channel, and when there is a channel whose count value is "00", sets an interrupt flag corresponding to that channel to the ON state. To do. At this time, if the interrupt is permitted, the timer circuit 90135 causes the interrupt controller 90136 to generate an interrupt request to the CPU 90131. The timer circuit 90135 may have a function as an RTC (Real Time Clock). The RTC can measure the current date and time and output date and time information including date information and time information.

The interrupt controller 90136 is a circuit capable of controlling various interrupt requests and the like generated in the effect control microcomputer 90120. The interrupt controlled by the interrupt controller 90136 includes a plurality of types of interrupts such as an X class interrupt (XIRQ), an I class interrupt (IRQ), a software interrupt (SWI), and an illegal opcode trap (ILGOP). You may stay. The interrupt controller 90136 includes an interrupt control register for setting permission/prohibition of interrupt and priority of interrupt for each type of interrupt. For example, the interrupt controller 90136 may be provided with interrupt control registers corresponding to various interrupts such as serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting. The V sync interrupt is an interrupt that matches the timing at which the vertical synchronizing signal is output from the VDP 90140 that draws an effect image or the like on the image display device 905. The interrupt control register corresponding to each interrupt has internal information data indicating whether the corresponding interrupt is permitted or not (interrupt permission/prohibition data) and internal information data indicating the priority of the corresponding interrupt (interrupt priority level). Data) and can be set. As for the permission/prohibition of interruption, for example, if the value of the interruption permission/prohibition data is “0”, the corresponding interruption is set to the permitted state, and if the value of the interruption permission/prohibition data is “1”, the corresponding interruption is prohibited. Set to state. The priority of the interrupt is set by a numerical value of 16 levels (4 bits) according to the interrupt priority data, and the priority of the interrupt corresponding to “0000 (=0H)” becomes the highest and “1111” is set. (=FH)", the priority of the interrupt corresponding to the case becomes the lowest. The interrupt control register is not limited to the serial reception interrupt setting, the timer interrupt setting, and the V sync interrupt setting. For example, an external interrupt, a serial transmission interrupt, an interrupt by a random number fetch of a random number circuit, etc. An interrupt control register may be provided in correspondence with an arbitrary interrupt related to control of production.

The internal information data set in the interrupt control register is previously set in a predetermined area (program management area or the like) of the internal ROM 90132. When powering on the pachinko gaming machine 901, the CPU 90131 sets the serial communication circuit 90137, sets random number generation, sets internal reset operation, etc. according to the setting contents of the program management area and the like. At this time, internal information data of the interrupt control register corresponding to various interrupts such as serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting for the interrupt controller 90136 is set. As a result, settings such as serial reception interrupt, timer interrupt, and V sync interrupt are made. For example, in the interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting, all the interrupt permission/prohibition data of the internal information data show a value of "0", Reception interrupt, timer interrupt, and V sync interrupt are all set to the enabled state. Further, regarding the interrupt priority data of the internal information data, the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the timer interrupt, and the timer interrupt has a higher priority than the V sink interrupt. Are set to the corresponding 4-bit values. A reset controller may be provided inside or outside the interrupt controller 90136. The reset controller controls various resets generated in the production control microcomputer 90120. Resets controlled by the reset controller include system resets and user resets. The system reset occurs when a low level signal is input to the SRST terminal for a certain period. For user reset, if a low level signal is input to the URST terminal for a certain period, a time-out signal of the watchdog timer 90134 is generated, an out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) signal is generated, an interval reset signal is output. When it occurs, it is caused by a predetermined user reset factor.

The serial communication circuit 90137 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from various boards and circuits other than the production control board 9012 by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 90137 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data compatible with a plurality of types of serial communication standards such as UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter), SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). The serial communication circuit 90137 may include a plurality of communication processing units including a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a communication control unit, a serial communication data register, a serial status register, a serial control register, and the like. UART is an asynchronous serial communication standard, and transfers communication data using start bits and stop bits. In this case, the clock signal line is unnecessary, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively low. SPI and I2C are clock synchronous serial communication standards, and transfer communication data using a clock signal. In this case, a clock signal line is required, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively high. In the case of SPI, signal lines corresponding to the clock signal, the transmission data signal, the reception data signal, and the slave selection signal are provided. In the case of I2C, signal lines corresponding to the clock signal and the data signal are provided. The plurality of communication processing units included in the serial communication circuit 90137 may have different hardware configurations according to the plurality of types of serial communication standards. The clock circuit 90138 is a circuit that generates a clock signal to be supplied to each circuit of the effect control microcomputer 90120, such as the CPU 90131 or VDP 90140. For example, the clock circuit divides the external clock input to the clock input terminal to generate an internal system clock signal, and supplies the internal system clock signal to each circuit of the effect control microcomputer 90120.

The VDP 90140 determines the control content of image display in the image display device 905 based on a display control command from the CPU 90131, register setting, and the like. For example, the VDP 90140 performs control for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays by deciding the switching timing of effect images displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. The VDP 90140 is an image processor having an image data processing function such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP 90140 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing more commonly called DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The audio processing circuit 90141 can generate an audio signal used for audio output by the speakers 908L and 908R based on an instruction or register setting from the CPU 90131 or VDP 90140. The lamp control circuit 90142 can generate an illumination signal according to a lighting mode (light emitting mode) such as lighting, turning off or blinking of a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 909 or the effect LED 9061. The motor control circuit 90143 can generate a drive control signal used for driving the effect motor 9060.

The external ROM 90121, as specific contents of the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 90120, various types of data such as instruction codes, management data, table data, effect control patterns, etc., which form a system program or a user program executed by the CPU 90131. Is fixedly stored. The external RAM 90122 temporarily stores various data as an auxiliary area of the internal RAM 90133. The connectors 90150 to 90156 are configured by using, for example, receptacles, and have a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting various signal wirings. The connectors 90150 to 90156 enable various signals to be output via different paths such as different wiring patterns on the production control board 9012. The connector 90150 is a main board wiring connector port to which main board wiring electrically connected to the main board 9011 can be connected. The connector 90151 is a power supply wiring connector port to which power supply wiring electrically connected to a power supply unit such as a power supply board can be connected. The connector 90152 is a connector port for production relay wiring to which production relay wiring electrically connected to a production relay portion such as a production control relay board 9017 can be connected. The connector 90153 is a frame lamp wiring connector port to which frame lamp wiring electrically connected between the lamp output board 9013 and the frame lamp portion provided with a part or all of the game effect lamp 909 can be connected. is there. The connector 90154 is a connector port for backup wiring to which a backup wiring electrically connected to a backup unit such as the backup memory board 9014 can be connected. The connector 90155 is a connector port for effect data wiring capable of connecting effect data wiring electrically connected to an effect data section such as the effect data memory board 9016. The connector 90156 is a connector port for inspection wiring to which an inspection wiring electrically connected to an information processing device for inspection, test, or development (personal computer or the like) can be connected. The information processing device for inspection may be any device that functions as an inspection device for the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, by executing a specific software program. Thus, the connector 90156 becomes an electronic component used as a connecting member to which the inspection device of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is connected.

The connector 90156 enables connection of inspection wiring, for example, at a trial production stage, a development stage, or a production stage of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the production control microcomputer 90120 ships in response to a test command different from the production control command. The previous inspection process may be made executable. The inspection process before shipment includes, for example, internal parameters and input/output signals when the production control microcomputer 90120 executes a part or all of the program code before the completion of the software program during trial manufacture or development. It may include verifiable processing. The verification environment in which the inspection process is executed before shipment may be, for example, an execution environment corresponding to a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 is installed on the gaming machine installation island, or the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a personal computer alone. It may be an execution environment in which the operating status can be confirmed by connecting to an information processing device such as. Further, the connector 90156 can be connected with inspection wiring at the recovery stage of the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, so that the backup data can be read out in response to a test command different from the production control command. Good. Alternatively, the connector 90156 may be detached at the stage of shipping the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. Alternatively, the connector 90156 is mounted only on a predetermined model such as a demo or a test other than the model in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 is installed in the game hall, and is a model (mass production machine) that is mass-produced and installed in the game hall. It may not be mounted. A land on which the connector 90156 can be mounted may be formed on the surface of the effect control board 9012. When the connector 90156 is removed or not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land where the connector 90156 is not mounted may be soldered. The soldering process is a process of applying solder to the exposed portion of the copper foil pattern, and may be performed using, for example, a cream solder printing machine, or may be performed by any method that does not use the cream solder printing machine. .. When the connector 90156 is mounted and when it is not mounted, the soldering process in the same process may be performed, or the soldering process in the different process may be performed. When the soldering process in the same process is performed, it is not necessary to form a plurality of patterns of metal masks used in a cream solder printing machine for applying solder to the lands, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in cost required for producing the substrate. By soldering unmounted lands on which electronic components such as the connector 90156 are not mounted, oxidation of the copper foil pattern is prevented, defects such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern are prevented, and board quality is appropriately maintained. be able to.

It should be noted that when the electronic component such as the connector 90156 is not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the electronic component is not mounted is not limited to the one that is subjected to the soldering treatment and covered, and for example, a resist that is an insulating coating is applied. It may be coated. In this way, by covering the land on which electronic components are not mounted by any method, it is possible to prevent oxidation of the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern, and maintain the board quality appropriately. I wish I could. On the other hand, the land on which the electronic component is not mounted may not be covered by soldering or the like. For example, when the land is soldered, the solder as a conductor may adhere to the copper foil pattern, which may cause an unintended short circuit or current path in the wiring pattern. Therefore, the land on which the electronic components are not mounted is not soldered to prevent the solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuit of the wiring pattern and changes in the current path, and ensure proper board quality. Can be maintained. By performing the insulation film treatment instead of the solder treatment, it is possible to prevent the adhesion of the solder to the copper foil pattern, prevent the defects such as the short circuit of the wiring pattern and the change of the current path, and appropriately maintain the quality of the board. You may do it.

FIG. 12A illustrates a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the backup memory substrate 9014. The backup memory board 9014 is provided with a memory controller 90200, an RTC 90201, a serial communication circuit 90202, an inspection connection section 90203, backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, and a connector 90220. As described above, the backup memory substrate 9014 is provided with the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D as a plurality of backup data storage units. The memory controller 90200 can execute backup data write processing and backup processing according to the backup control signal from the effect control board 9012. The RTC 90201 can measure the current date and time, and can supply date and time information including date information and time information to the memory controller 90200. The serial communication circuit 90202 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from the effect control board 9012 by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 90202 only needs to be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data such as SPI, which corresponds to a specific serial communication standard. The serial communication circuit 90202 should just be equipped with the communication processing part of the hardware constitution corresponding to such a specific serial communication standard. The inspection connecting portion 90203 may be formed as a specific conductor portion including a terminal capable of inputting and outputting an inspection signal, such as a test point. When the inspection connecting portion 90203 is a test point, a test probe is brought into contact with the inspection connecting portion 90203 to input/output an inspection signal between the inspection device and the production control microcomputer 90120 of the production control board 9012. Alternatively, it is only necessary that the backup data can be read. The inspection connection unit 90203 inputs an inspection signal between the inspection device and the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory board 9014 or the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D without passing through the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012. It may be possible to output or read backup data. In this way, the inspection connection unit 90203 can provide an interface for performing data communication with the inspection device, which is an external device, on the backup memory board 9014.

The backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be partially or entirely configured by using a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric RAM), and a part or all of the battery-equipped SRAM (Static RAM). May be used. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be partially or entirely configured by using a flash memory such as a NAND-ROM, an EEPROM, or an HDD (Hard Disk Drive). A nonvolatile ferroelectric memory called FRAM (registered trademark) has a memory cell using a ferroelectric film as a capacitor insulating film, and a memory written in the memory cell even when the operating power supply is turned off. No data is lost. The configuration using FRAM (registered trademark) does not require a battery backup for holding data, and has high-speed writing, high rewriting frequency, and low power consumption as compared with a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory, an EEPROM, or an HDD. As a result, it is possible to prevent the installation area from increasing, simplify the device configuration, improve the operation efficiency, and appropriately store and save the backup data. Further, it is not necessary to dispose of the battery, it is possible to prevent the stored contents from being lost due to the replacement of the battery, and it is possible to appropriately store and save the backup data. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be backed up by a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board. As described above, the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D can retain the stored contents even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be capable of holding the stored contents without using a backup power source, for example, when a part or all of them are configured by using FRAM (registered trademark). Alternatively, the backup data memories 90210A and 90210B may be capable of holding the stored contents by using a backup power supply, for example, when a part or all of the backup data memories 90210A and 90210B are configured by using an SRAM with a battery.

The backup memory board 9014 uses the date and time information output by the RTC 90201 to store and store various log information in log areas provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D. The memory controller 90200 can execute the writing process and the reading process of the stored data with respect to the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D according to the command or instruction sent from the production control microcomputer 90120 of the production control board 9012. In this case, by executing a writing process and a reading process of stored data indicating log information including date and time information, an operation history, a setting history, and a history of a plurality of electronic components used for a game or effect in the pachinko gaming machine 901. It suffices if the error history can be stored so that it can be verified afterwards.

FIG. 12B shows a configuration example for connecting the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014. The production control board 9012 includes a connector 90154 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 90220 of the backup memory board 9014. The backup memory board 9014 includes a connector 90220 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 90154 of the effect control board 9012. By coupling the connector 90154 and the connector 90220, the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 can be physically and electrically connected. The connector 90154 provided on the production control board 9012 includes terminals TM01 to TM06. The connector 90220 provided on the backup memory substrate 9014 includes terminals TM11 to TM16. The terminals TM01 to TM06 included in the connector 90154 and the terminals TM11 to TM16 included in the connector 90220 have corresponding terminals (for example, terminals TM01 and TM11) physically and electrically when the connectors 90154 and 90220 are coupled. It is sufficient if it is connected to.

The terminal TM01 included in the connector 90154 of the production control board 9012 can provide a specific voltage such as VD1. The terminal TM02 included in the connector 90154 of the effect control board 9012 can receive the VD1 of the specific voltage used for confirming the connection with the backup memory board 9014. For example, the specific voltage VD1 output from the terminal TM01 included in the connector 90154 of the effect control board 9012 is supplied to the terminal TM11 included in the connector 90220 of the backup memory board 9014. The terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 90220 may be short-circuited on the backup memory substrate 9014. Therefore, when the connector 90154 and the connector 90220 are coupled, the voltage corresponding to VD1 is supplied from the terminal TM12 of the connector 90220 on the backup board 14 to the terminal TM02 of the connector 90154 on the effect control board 9012. R. On the other hand, in the unconnected state where the connector 90154 and the connector 90220 are not coupled, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM02 of the connector 90154 in the effect control board 9012.

In the effect control board 9012, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 90154 in order to confirm the connection state with the backup memory board 9014. In this case, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a high voltage value corresponding to VD1, it can be determined that the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 are connected (connected state). On the other hand, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a low voltage value corresponding to the non-supply of voltage, it can be determined that the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 are not connected (unconnected state). In this way, the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 may be confirmed based on the voltage at the terminal TM02 which is the connection confirmation member. The connection state is not limited to the one that confirms the connection state based on the terminal voltage, and the connection state may be confirmed based on the input state of the specific signal, for example. Alternatively, the connection state may be confirmed by using a switch or a sensor as a connection confirmation member.

The terminals TM03 to TM06 included in the connector 90154 of the effect control board 9012 are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 90137 included in the effect control microcomputer 90120. The terminals TM13 and TM14 included in the connector 90220 of the backup memory board 9014 are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 90202. Therefore, the wirings connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 90154 and the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 90220 are connected to the CPU 90131 of the production control microcomputer 90120 and the backup memory board via the serial communication circuit 90137 and the serial communication circuit 90202. An electrical connection is provided between the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of 9014 so that the stored data can be transferred. The terminals TM15 and TM16 included in the connector 90220 of the backup memory board 9014 are connected to the inspection connecting portion 90203 by wiring. Thereby, the wirings connected to the terminals TM05 and TM06 of the connector 90154 and the terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 90220 are for inspection of the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the backup memory substrate 9014 via the serial communication circuit 90137. An electrical connection is provided so that a test signal can be transmitted and received and stored data can be transferred to and from the connection portion 90203.

The backup memory board 9014 is configured to be attachable to and detachable from the effect control board 9012. Thus, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine 901 that does not use the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, the backup memory substrate 9014 can be removed, which increases flexibility of the device configuration and increases manufacturing cost. Can be prevented. Further, since the backup memory substrate 9014 can be removed and the stored data can be read and analyzed, the work load of inspecting the stored data can be reduced. The RTC included in the timer circuit 90135 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 provided on the effect control board 9012 may provide the current time for timing adjustment for executing an effect in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 901 are interlocked. Yes, relatively high precision is required. On the other hand, the RTC 90201 of the backup memory board 9014 needs only to be able to specify the context of the storage processing executed on the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D, so that the RTC 90201 can be of relatively low precision and sufficiently satisfy the application. You can As described above, since the RTC 90201 of the backup memory substrate 9014 may be of relatively low precision, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost. The configuration and function of the backup memory board 9014 may be configured to be included in the effect control board 9012. For example, the configurations and functions of the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D may be realized by the external RAM 90122. Even in this case, for example, the wiring pattern in the effect control board 9012, or the switch or the sensor may be used as the connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game is played using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined value is determined based on a player performing a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) on a hit ball operation handle provided in a lower right position of a game machine frame 903 in a pachinko game machine 901. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the hit ball launching device. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes (enters) various winning openings, the game ball as a prize ball is paid out. For example, based on that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 9041, it becomes possible to execute the universal figure game by the normal symbol display 9020. In the ordinary figure game, the ordinary symbols are variably displayed, and when a particular ordinary symbol that is a regular figure per symbol is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". The variable display of the ordinary symbols is performed, and when the ordinary symbols other than the regular symbols which are the regular symbols lost symbols are stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbols becomes "the regular symbols lost". In the case of "universal figure hit", the opening control is performed to open the normally variable winning ball device 906B for a predetermined period, and the second start winning port is opened. When the game ball passes through the first starting prize hole formed in the normal winning ball device 906A, the first starting prize is generated. When the game ball passes through the second start winning hole formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the second starting prize is generated. The variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols can be executed based on the occurrence of the first start prize and the second start prize. The special symbol includes a big hit symbol and a deviating symbol, and when the big hit symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display result is "big hit", and when the deviant symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display result. Is the "miss". When the variable display result of the special design or the decorative design is “big hit”, the special winning opening is opened and the game ball is easily passed (entered), which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a big hit game state.

The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability variation state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the big hit game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is greater than the second round number (for example, "7"), and can be executed in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (eg, “100”) larger than the second number (eg, “50”), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (eg, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chans, which is the number of times it is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is larger than the second consecutive chan number (for example, "5"). It may include that a game situation is more advantageous for the player, such as a part or all of the case where one consecutive chan number (for example, “10”) is reached.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described. On the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes game control main processing.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing executed by the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011. In the game control main processing, interrupt prohibition is set (step S901). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 90102 accessible, and the like.

After the initial setting, it is determined whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear switch is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board, and when the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, a clear signal in the on state is input to the game control microcomputer 90100 via the input port. If such a clear signal has not been input, it may be determined in step S903 that the clear switch is off. The backup data can be stored in the RAM 90102 which is a backup RAM for game control. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 90103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 901 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 90102, a data protection process of the RAM 90102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, a backup flag state, and an error detection code. In step S903, it is determined whether the backup flag is on, and if it is on, it is determined that there is backup data. The backup data stored in this way is determined, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum, to determine whether or not the power supply is stopped and restarted. If they match, the backup RAM may be determined to be normal in step S903.

When the restoration condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), the restoration processing (step S904) and the setting confirmation processing (step S905) are executed. In the recovery processing in step S904, the work area is set based on the storage content of the RAM 90102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state when the power supply is stopped is restored, and when the special symbol is being changed, it is sufficient that the change of the special symbol can be restarted from the state before the restoration. If the restoration condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), the initialization process (step S906) and the setting change process (step S907) are executed. In the initialization process of step S906, a RAM clear process of clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 90102 is performed, and an initial value is set in the work area.

In the setting confirmation processing in step S905, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. For example, the setting confirmation condition is that the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is ON and the setting key 9051 is ON at the start of power supply when the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed. Applies when both are met. When the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is off or when the setting key 9051 is off, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied, and the setting confirmation processing ends. When the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is ON and the setting key 9051 is ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear switch being off is satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation condition can include that the clear switch is off. In the setting confirmation processing of step S905, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the setting confirmation state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is performed from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. A confirmation start command is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stopped state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the game ball is released by operating the hit ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches is stopped, and the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, ordinary symbols The display 9020 may be controlled so as to stop the display of the off symbol and the like, and to display a game stop state different from the off symbol. In the setting confirmation state, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 9029. When ending the setting confirmation state, the game stop state accompanying it ends, and the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. For example, the setting change condition is that the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is ON and the setting key 9051 is ON at the start of power supply when the setting change process of step S907 is executed. Applies when both are met. The setting change condition may include that the clear switch is on. In the setting change process of step S907, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is off, the setting key 9051 is off, or the clear switch is off, the setting change condition is satisfied. It is determined that there is not, and the setting change process ends. When the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is ON, the setting key 9051 is ON, and when the clear switch is ON, it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied. .. When the setting change condition is satisfied, the setting change state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed is set, and the setting change start command is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. .. When the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be in the game stopped state as in the setting confirmation state. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 9052 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 9029 is sequentially updated and displayed. For example, each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 9052 is detected, the set value is updated as “1”→“2”→“3”→“1”→... Then, based on the fact that the setting key 9051 is turned off by an operation by a staff member in the game hall, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 9029 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 90102, and the display monitor 9029 is also displayed. To turn off. As a result, a person in charge of the game hall is notified that the new setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102. When ending the setting change state, the game stop state accompanying it ends, and the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012.

On the production control board 9012 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 905, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R, or a light emitting member such as the effect LED 9061 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner. When the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed, the operation of pressing the operation button for production such as the push button 9031B is detected, and "maintenance mode" is displayed to shift to the maintenance mode. You may comprise. The “maintenance mode” is, for example, date and time setting in the RTC of the timer circuit 90135, history of various errors (record of when and what kind of error occurred), setting change history (when set value is changed, This is a mode in which you can check the record of the changed setting values. When the setting key 9051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode may be completed.

Thus, when the setting key 9051 is turned on when the power is turned on (in addition, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 9090 is turned on), if the clear switch is turned on, the initialization process of step S906 and step S907 are performed. When the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed together with the restoration process of step S904, and it is possible to control the setting confirmation state. On the other hand, when the setting key 9051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed while the setting change state is not controlled and the clear switch is turned on. If it is off, the recovery process of step S904 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process of step S905 or the setting change process of step S907, a random number circuit setting process is executed (step S908). The random number circuit setting process is a process in which the numerical data indicating the game random number can be updated by initializing the random number circuit 90104. The random number circuit 90104 may be capable of autonomously updating the numerical data indicating the game random number without executing the random number circuit setting processing by the CPU 90103. Subsequently, an interrupt initial setting process is executed (step S909). The interrupt initial setting process is a process in which permission/prohibition of interrupt and priority can be set according to an interrupt factor generated in the game control microcomputer 90100. For example, the CPU 90103 may read the interrupt initial setting information stored in a predetermined area (such as the program management area) of the ROM 90101, and set the permission/prohibition of interrupt and the priority according to the read value for each interrupt factor. .. The interrupt initial setting process includes a process of generating a regular timer interrupt every predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.) by setting the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100. You may stay. After that, the interrupt permission is set (step S9010), and then the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process. Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepting the interrupt request, the CPU 90103 executes the game control timer interrupt process.

The game control timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 90103 may include a switch process, a main error process, an information output process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, and a command control process. .. The switch process is a process in which the CPU 90103 determines the presence or absence of a detection signal received from various switches via the switch circuit 90110. The main-side error process is a process of diagnosing an abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and enabling a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output processing is, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of times of big hits, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, start information (information indicating the number of start winnings, etc.), This is a process that enables output of data such as probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed). The game random number update process is a process that allows at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side to be updated by software. The special symbol process process is a process that enables management of execution and suspension of a special figure game, control of a big hit game state and a small hit game state, control of a game state, and the like. Ordinary symbol process processing is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 9021 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 9041) management of the execution and suspension of the universal game, variable winning ball based on "per universal map" This is a process that enables the opening control of the device 6B. The command control process is a process that enables the production control command set for transmission to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the production control board 9012.

In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, first, the start winning determination process is executed. After the start winning determination process is executed, any one of the plurality of processes is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102. Processes that can be selected according to the value of the special figure process flag are special symbol normal processing, fluctuation pattern setting processing, special symbol fluctuation processing, special symbol stop processing, big hit opening pre-processing, big hit opening processing, big hit opening post processing, It suffices to include some or all of the processing according to the game control program, such as the big hit ending processing, the small hit opening preprocessing, the small hit opening processing, and the small hit ending processing.

In the start prize determination process, it is determined whether or not the first start prize or the second start prize has occurred, and if so, the setting for updating the number of reserved memories is performed. The reserved storage number indicates the number of times variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols that have not been started yet is performed. In the special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the execution of the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit". Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, the setting of the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game is performed in correspondence with the variable display result. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the variable display result and the like. In the special symbol variation processing, settings for varying the special symbol, settings for measuring the elapsed time from the start of variation, and the like are performed. In the special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result is stopped and displayed (derived).

In the big hit opening pre-processing, the variable display result corresponds to "big hit", and settings for opening the special winning opening in the big hit game state are performed. In the big hit opening process, it is determined whether or not to return the big winning opening that has been opened in the big hit game state to the closed state. In the jackpot opening post-processing, after returning the special winning opening to the closed state, it is determined whether the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit value.If not, the next round can be executed, and if it has been reached, Settings for ending the jackpot gaming state are made. In the big hit ending process, after waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect for notifying the end of the big hit game state has elapsed, settings for starting the probability variation control and the time saving control are performed. In the small hit opening pre-process, the variable display result corresponds to "small hit", and settings for opening the special winning opening in the small hit game state are performed. In the process of opening the small hit, it is determined whether or not to return the big winning opening that has been opened in the small hit game state to the closed state. In the small hit end process, after waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 before becoming the small hit gaming state Settings are made to continue.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. In the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit can be changed. The set value consists of three levels from "1" to "3", "1" has the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value in the order of "1", "2", "3", the higher the payout rate. .. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of "2" and "3", the advantage increases in stages. The winning probability of the small hit may be the same regardless of the set value.

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 90101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for display result determination is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), that is, the first special symbol (the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4) is subject to variable display. When, and the variable special map designation buffer value is "2" (second), that is, the second special symbol (special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4) is the target of variable display For each of these cases, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set. FIG. 14A shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value “1”, FIG. 14B shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value “2”, and FIG. The display result determination table corresponding to the setting value "3" is shown.

When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value "1", if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display If the set value is “2” or “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 in the non-probable variation, 1/32 in the probable variation). When the set value is "1" and the variable special map designation buffer value is "1" (first), some of the judgment values are set as the judgment values corresponding to the small hit, and the set values are When it is "1", the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". When the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is "2" (second), the same judgment value as when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is "1" (first) is used as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit. It is set, and even when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 during non-probability change, probability change time) 1/32) wins the big hit. When the setting value is “1” and the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is “2” (second), half of the determination values are set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, Similar to the case where the value is "2" or "3", the small hit is won with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value “2”, the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” (first), which is higher than the setting value “1”. You win the jackpot with a probability (1/300 when uncertain change, 1/30 when uncertain change). When the setting value is "2" and the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1" (second) as the determination value corresponding to the big hit. The same judgment value as in the case of 1) is set, and even when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. (1/300 when uncertain changes, 1/30 when uncertain changes) wins the big hit. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value “3”, the setting values are “1” and “2” when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” (first). The jackpot is won with a higher probability than in the case (1/280 at non-probable change, 1/28 at probable change). When the setting value is "3" and the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1" (second) as the determination value corresponding to the big hit. The same judgment value as in the case of 1) is set, and even when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. (1/280 when uncertain changes, 1/28 when uncertain changes) wins the big hit.

The CPU 90103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. As a result, a big win or a small win is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” here indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Determining whether or not to the big hit is to determine whether to control the big hit gaming state, in the big hit symbol the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B It's also about deciding whether or not to do it. Determining whether to make a small hit, is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, small stop symbol in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B It is also to decide whether or not to make a winning design. The winning probability of the small hit may be different depending on the set value. For example, similar to the winning probability of the big hit, the winning probability of the small hit may increase as the set value increases in the order of “1”, “2”, and “3”. The setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. If the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “1” is set to 1/100, the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “2” is designed to be 1/93.75, and the setting value “3” is set. It may be set so that the winning probability of the small hit in 1/8 is 1/87.5. When a small hit is not provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a display result determination table excluding the hit determination value corresponding to the small hit may be used. The big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is a case where it is a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol irrespective of the variation special figure designation buffer value. In this case, a small table is determined for each of the cases where the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is "1" (first) and "2" (second). You may make it perform using. You may comprise so that the ranking of an advantage may change according to a game state. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a high probability/high base state, maintain the high probability/high base state until the next big hit occurs, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and it may be a period in which a prize ball can be easily obtained. Therefore, a specific game state (in this example, In high probability/high base state), unlike other gaming states, big hits are unlikely to occur (high probability/high base state is easy to continue). Set value “1” is the most advantageous setting. May be. When applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends after being controlled to the probability variation state (high-probability state) and a predetermined number of times (probability variation end number) is displayed, the same probability variation end number For example, the probability change continuation rate (rate of continuous vacation) may be configured to increase in the order of set value “1”<set value “2”<set value “3”. The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be two or four or more.

When the variable display result of the special design or the decorative design is “big hit”, the big hit type may be set. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening and gaming states (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) after the big hit gaming state are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these. May be done. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls, a big hit type with few prize balls, or a big hit type that hardly obtains prize balls may be provided. In order to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of big hit types A to big hit type C based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” You may provide the jackpot classification determination table referred. In the jackpot type determination table, the determination value may be assigned such that the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on which of the setting values is “1” to “3”. For example, when the set value is "1", the percentage determined as the big hit type C is high, and when the set value is "2", the percentage determined as the big hit type B is high and the set value is "3". In the case of, the determination value may be assigned such that the proportion determined in the big hit type A is high.

The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the big hit game may be set for each big hit type. The fanfare period, for example, on the main board 9011 side, is a period when the big hit opening pretreatment of the special symbol process processing is executed, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 9012 side, the big hit game state is started. It is a period in which the fanfare production as the production operation to be notified is executed. In the interval period, for example, on the main board 9011 side, a jackpot opening post-processing of special symbol process processing is executed, and on the effect control board 9012 side, after the round in which the special winning opening is opened is completed, Is a period during which an interval effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round. The ending period, for example, the main board 9011 side, is a period in which the big hit end processing of the special symbol process processing is executed, on the effect control board 9012 side, the ending effect as a performance operation to notify the end of the big hit game state is executed It is a period of time. As an example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be set to be longest in the big hit type A, longest in the big hit type B, and shortest in the big hit type C. .. If the ratio of determination as the big hit type C is high when the setting value is "1", the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. When the set value is “3”, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long if the percentage of the jackpot type A determined is high. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be made longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

It is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value “1”<“2”<“3”, and at the same time, the set value is “1”<“2”<“3”. In this order, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be increased. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed and Can be prevented from becoming too high. During the big hit game, a big hit medium suggestion effect that suggests a set value may be configured to be executable. The suggestion during big hit can be executed during the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period. This can enhance the fun of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period. Also, by directing the interest of the player to the suggestive effect during the big hit, it is possible to make the duration of each period less noticeable. In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is not easily noticed by the players is commonly executed. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set regardless of the set value. Any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the determination values are set such that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which a relatively long period is set is selected in the order of the big hit type A<B<C is used. This makes it possible to increase the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

The number of time saving control and probability variation control may be different for each big hit type, and in the case of a specific big hit type, the high accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state are the big hit game. After the end of the state, it may be continuously executed until the big hit occurs again. In the case of such a specific big hit type, the big hit game state is a so-called condominium state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the jackpot rate differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive unit rate) may be different for each set value. For each big hit type, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, and the number of times of control may be made different so as to have different advantages. In this case, the effects during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type. Depending on the set value that has been set, there may be one or more jackpot types that cannot be determined among the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C. That is, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Includes determining by percentage. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be different regardless of the type of big hit. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to the set values “1” to “3”. Further, for example, depending on which one of the set values “1” to “3” is set, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed to determine the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period. You may. It suffices if the enjoyment of the game can be improved by changing the determination rate of the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” according to the set value that has been set. The jackpot type may be determined using the random number value MR1 for display result determination. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The execution rate of normal reach or super reach may differ depending on the set value, so that the set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach or super reach is executed. Regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period. Using the RTC of the game control microcomputer 90100 or the like, a special period may be set in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 10 am to 11 am). The period until the first big hit occurs may be the special period. In the special period, even if the variation pattern determination table in which the determination value is assigned is set so that the ratio of the normal reach loss is higher than that of the non-special period and the difference in the ratio of the normal reach loss between the set values becomes large. Good. As a result, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the game is motivated to play in the special period. It is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestive effects at different ratios according to the set values. For example, in the case of the specific setting value, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, a limit is set as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestive effect is lower than in a range where the setting value is the specific setting value. There may be provided a setting suggestion effect that can be executed at a predetermined rate when the setting value is the specific setting value, and is not executed when the setting value is a value other than the specific setting value. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value, a limit is set as a limit that the setting suggestive effect is not executed.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, an arbitrary setting suggestion effect may be executed at different rates. For example, in the case of the special period, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a range other than the special period, a limit is set as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestive effect is lower than that in the range being the special period. There may be provided a setting suggestion effect that can be executed at a predetermined rate during the special period and is not executed during the period other than the special period. In this way, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio in the range of the special period. On the other hand, in a range other than the special period, a limit is set as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether it is a special period or not, and it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestive effects at different ratios depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in a range where the special condition is not satisfied, a limit is set as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than that in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate when the special condition is satisfied, and is not executed when the special condition is not satisfied. In this way, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio within the range where the special condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in a range where the special condition is not satisfied, a limit is set as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history of the production in the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the effect. It may be any condition that can be satisfied in accordance with the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied. The performance mode may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not the execution timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are satisfied. .. Further, an arbitrary effect may be provided with a limit as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in a range where a preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with a range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be set as a limit that the execution ratio decreases and the execution is difficult.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. In the effect control board 9012, when power supply from the power supply board is started, the effect control microcomputer 90120 is activated, and the CPU 90131 executes effect control main processing. The program for executing the effect control main process may be stored in advance in one or both of the internal ROM 90132 and the external ROM 90121. As described above, a part or all of the program for executing the effect control main processing may be stored in advance in the internal ROM 90132 or the external ROM 90121.

FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main processing executed by the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. In the effect control main process, an initialization process is executed (step S9021). In the initialization processing of step S9021, one or both of the external RAM 90122 and the internal RAM 90133 are cleared to set various initial values, and the register settings of the timer circuit 90135 are initialized. Following the initialization process, an initial operation control process is executed (step S9022). In the initial operation control processing of step S9022, control for performing the initial operation of the production movable member, such as control for driving the production motor 9060 to return the production movable member to the initial position and control for confirming the operation, is executed. .. After the initial operation control processing, power-on information processing is executed (step S9023). In the power-on information processing of step S9023, a storage process of log information including the power-on date and time may be executed. The data indicating the log information is written and stored as backup data in the log area provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory substrate 9014. The CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 transmits a control signal corresponding to the backup command for power-on to the backup memory substrate 9014 via the serial communication circuit 90137. In the backup memory substrate 9014, the memory controller 90200 responds to the backup command indicated by the control signal received via the serial communication circuit 90202, and writes the log information including the power-on date and time by using the date and time information acquired from the RTC 90201. It suffices to execute the processing. In the power-on information processing in step S9023, a backup restoration process may be executed to restore settings and control based on the log information stored in the log area.

After power-on information processing, interrupt initialization processing is executed (step S9024). In the interrupt initialization process of step S9024, it is sufficient that the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller 90136 can be initialized. The priority order of the interrupts controlled by the interrupt controller 90136 may be set based on the interrupt priority data stored in advance in a program management area or the like provided in one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132. For example, the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the effect control timer interrupt, and the effect control timer interrupt has a higher priority than the V sync interrupt so that the priority of the interrupt is higher. Should be set. After setting the interrupt permission (step S9025), the loop processing is started.

FIG. 15B shows a setting example of the processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 90120. The processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 90120 may be determined in advance based on the priority of the interrupt controlled by the interrupt controller 90136 and the specifications of the effect control microcomputer 90120. As an example, the CPU exception event occurrence process has the highest priority, then the VDP error interrupt process has the highest priority, and then the process according to the interrupt priority order controlled by the interrupt controller 90136. The processing priority may be set in advance so that the priority becomes. The VDP error interrupt process may be executed based on the occurrence of an interrupt factor that can be controlled by the interrupt controller 90136. In this case, for example, the priority order of the VDP error interrupt may be set by the interrupt initialization process in step S9024 so that the priority level of the VDP error interrupt becomes highest. The CPU exception event occurrence process is a process executed by the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 when an exception event occurs due to an abnormality in the internal state. The exceptional event of the CPU 90131 may occur when an undefined instruction that is not defined in the instruction set is decoded. The exceptional event of the CPU 90131 may occur when an invalid operation such as division by zero or overflow is executed. The exceptional event of the CPU 90131 may occur when a storage protection violation in the virtual memory occurs. The exceptional event of the CPU 90131 may occur in the case of a TLB (Translation Lookaside Buffer) miss in which translation from a virtual address to a physical address becomes abnormal. The VDP error interrupt process is a process executed when an error interrupt request is generated by the VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 due to an abnormality in the internal state or the like. The error interrupt request of the VDP 90140 may be generated in response to an exceptional event of the VDP 90140, as in the case of the CPU 90131. In addition, the VDP 90140 error interrupt request may be issued when the setting of the clock signal (dot clock) used for display control of the image display device 905 is abnormal. The VDP 90140 error interrupt request may be issued when the decoding of the moving image data is abnormal. The VDP 90140 error interrupt request may be issued when the audio data is decoded abnormally. The VDP 90140 error interrupt request may be generated in response to a system reset in the VDP 90140. In this way, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when an exception event of the CPU 90131 occurs. The VDP error interrupt process is executed when an error interrupt request of the VDP 90140 is generated. Therefore, when the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the CPU 90131 is satisfied, the CPU exception event occurrence time process is executed. When the occurrence condition of the event corresponding to the internal state of VDP 90140 is satisfied, the VDP error interrupt process is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing and the VDP error interrupt processing can be executed when the conditions for occurrence of an event that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control device or the processing device such as the CPU 90131 or VDP 90140 are satisfied.

FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing an example of CPU exception event occurrence processing. In the CPU exception event occurrence processing, first, exception time preprocessing is executed (step S9041). In the exception preprocessing in step S9041, the control information for executing the instruction code is saved in, for example, a predetermined area (stack area or the like) of the internal RAM 90133. The control information for executing the instruction code may include the stored value of the program counter (PC) and the value of the program status word (PSW). Subsequent to the pre-exception processing, the backup processing at the exceptional time is executed (step S9042). In the exceptional backup process of step S9042, a process of storing log information including exceptional event information is executed. In this case, a control signal corresponding to the backup instruction for the exceptional event occurrence is transmitted to the backup memory board 9014. The backup instruction at the time of occurrence of an exceptional event may include exceptional event information indicating an exceptional event that has occurred in the CPU 90131. The exceptional event information may indicate the type of exceptional event in a distinguishable manner. When the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory board 9014 receives the backup command for the occurrence of the exceptional event, the date and time information acquired from the RTC 90201 may be used to execute the writing process of the log information including the exceptional event information.

After the exceptional backup processing, other exceptional processing is executed (step S9043). In step S9043, for example, the exception handling routine may be started by accessing the vector table and jumping to the obtained exception handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the CPU 90131 may be saved. If the exception event can be resolved by the exception processing routine, or if the exception event cannot be resolved and a reset occurs, the same backup process as in step S9042 is executed to resolve the exception event. The log information when there is no log may be stored. When the exceptional process is completed, the exceptional post-process is executed (step S9044) and the CPU exceptional event occurrence process is terminated. In the post-exception process of step S9044, it is possible to return to the process before the occurrence of the exception event by restoring the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the CPU 90131 and restoring the control information for executing the instruction code. Good.

FIG. 16B is a flowchart showing an example of the VDP error interrupt processing. In the VDP error interrupt process, first, an error interrupt preprocess is executed (step S9051). In the error interrupt preprocessing of step S9051, the control information for executing the instruction code is saved in a predetermined area (such as a stack area) of the internal RAM 90133, for example. Following the error interrupt pre-process, an error interrupt backup process is executed (step S9052). In the backup processing at the time of error interrupt in step S9052, the storage processing of the log information including the VDP error information is executed. In this case, the control signal corresponding to the backup command for the VDP error occurrence is transmitted to the backup memory substrate 9014. The backup command at the time of VDP error occurrence may include VDP error information indicating an error that occurred in VDP 90140. The VDP error information may indicate the type of VDP error in a distinguishable manner. When the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory board 9014 receives the backup command when the VDP error occurs, the memory controller 90200 may execute the writing process of the log information including the VDP error information using the date and time information acquired from the RTC 90201.

Following the error interrupt backup processing, other error interrupt processing is executed (step S9053). In step S9053, for example, depending on the interrupt factor corresponding to the VDP error, the processing may branch to the interrupt processing routine by jumping to the acquired interrupt handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the CPU 90131 may be saved. If the VDP 90140 is capable of autonomously performing the recovery process from the internal error, the VDP 90140 may stand by until the notification of the completion of the recovery or the notification of the reset occurrence due to the inability to recover. Upon receiving these notifications, the backup process similar to step S9052 may be executed to store the log information when the VDP 90140 recovers from the error state or cannot recover. When the error interrupt process ends, the error interrupt post process is executed (step S9054), and the VDP error interrupt process ends. In the error interrupt post-processing of step S9054, it is possible to return to the processing before the VDP error occurrence by restoring the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the CPU 90131 and restoring the control information for instruction code execution. And it is sufficient.

The CPU exception event occurrence processing includes the exception backup processing in step S9042. The VDP error interrupt process includes the backup process at the time of error interrupt in step S9052. In the exceptional backup process of step S9042, as backup data indicating log information, data including exceptional event information relating to the CPU 90131 among the plurality of electronic components is stored in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory board 9014. A writing process for writing in the area is executed. In the backup process at the time of error interrupt in step S9052, as backup data indicating log information, data including VDP error information regarding VDP 90140 among a plurality of electronic components is provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory substrate 9014. A writing process for writing in the log area is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when the occurrence condition of the event corresponding to the internal state of the CPU 90131 is satisfied and when the exception event of the CPU 90131 occurs. The VDP error interrupt processing is executed when an event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the VDP 90140 is satisfied and when an error interrupt request of the VDP 90140 occurs. As described above, when the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the control device or the processing device such as the CPU 90131 or the VDP 90140 is satisfied, the information regarding the plurality of electronic components is written in the storage area such as the log area. A writing process for storing can be executed.

After the interrupt permission is set in step S9025 of the effect control main process, a timeout occurs in a predetermined channel of the timer circuit 90135 every predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.), so that the interrupt controller 90136 instructs the CPU 90131. Then, an interrupt request signal corresponding to the timer interrupt for effect control is output. Upon receiving the interrupt request signal and accepting the interrupt request, the CPU 90131 starts execution of the effect control timer interrupt process.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 90131. In the effect control timer interrupt processing, command analysis processing is executed (step S9071). In the command analysis processing of step S9071, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect is read. Settings and control corresponding to control commands are performed. Following the command analysis processing, effect control process processing is executed (step S9072). In the effect control process processing, for example, an operation for displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, an operation for outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting operation for a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 909 and the effect LED 9061, an effect motor 9060. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, regarding the control content of the production operation using various production devices, various determinations regarding production, depending on the production control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the elapsed time or the detection result depending on the progress situation of the game or production. Decisions, settings, etc. are made.

After the effect control process processing, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S9073). In the production random number updating process in step S9073, at least a part of the production random numbers used on the production control board 9012 side is updated by software. After the production random number update processing, production mode change processing is executed (step S9074). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be controlled in three types of effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C, and depending on which effect mode is controlled, for example, the background screen of the image display device 905 is Differently, the types of characters appearing in the notice production and the reach production may be different. Control for changing from the current effect mode to a different effect mode may be performed when the effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, based on the date and time information acquired from the RTC included in the timer circuit 90135, when a specific date or time comes, the effect mode change condition may be satisfied and the effect mode may be changed. Alternatively, the effect mode may be changed when the lottery process using the random numbers for effect is executed and the effect mode change condition is satisfied according to the determination result.

Following the effect mode change processing, error notification processing is executed (step S9075). In the error notification processing of step S9075, control for notifying various errors that have occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed. The notification by such control may include left-handed notification and full tank notification. The left-hand hit notification is, for example, a notification that prompts the player to perform a left-hand hit operation based on the total number of times that the game ball has been detected to pass through a passage gate provided in the right area of the game area. The left-handed notification is, for example, a notification by displaying characters such as “Aim for the left!” on the image display device 905, a notification by turning on all the game effect lamps 909, and a notification sound is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The notification may be included, or a combination of some or all of these may be included. The full tank notification is a notification that prompts the player to cancel the full tank status based on the elapsed time when the surplus ball storage tray (lower tray) is in the full tank state. .. The full tank notification is, for example, a notification by displaying characters such as "the bottom plate is full!" on the image display device 905, a notification by turning on all the game effect lamps 909, and a notification sound from the speakers 908L and 908R. May be included, or a combination of some or all of these may be included. In addition, the error notification processing is performed by displaying, lighting or emitting light, outputting sound, or a combination of some or all of these in accordance with the occurrence of an error designated by the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 9011. It suffices to include control for notifying various errors that have occurred. Alternatively, regardless of the game control error designation command, when it is determined that an error relating to electronic components including the rendering device has occurred, depending on the processing result of the CPU 90131, display, lighting, light emission, sound output, or Control for notifying various errors that have occurred may be performed by a combination of some or all of these.

After the error notification processing, maintenance mode processing is executed (step S9076). In the maintenance mode process of step S9076, control is performed so that the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen can be displayed. The maintenance history screen is, for example, when the setting confirmation display corresponding to the setting confirmation state or the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed, detection of an operation to be performed by an attendant of the game arcade on the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B. It can be displayed when it is determined that the maintenance history selection operation is performed based on the result. When displaying the maintenance history screen, all log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory substrate 9014. On the image display device 905, a maintenance history screen including the read log information as history information is displayed. The setting change/confirmation history screen can be displayed when it is determined that the setting change/confirmation history selection operation has been performed based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, which is an operation performed by an attendant in the game arcade. Become. When the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, all setting change and setting confirmation log information is read from the log area provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory substrate 9014. The image display device 905 displays a setting change/confirmation history screen including the read setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information. Note that the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen are different from the staff at the game arcade, and can be displayed based on the detection result of the operation that is performed by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Good. The maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen are screens that the player of the pachinko gaming machine 901 cannot see while playing, and may be screens that can be confirmed by an attendant of the game hall or a person in charge of the manufacturer. Good.

After the maintenance mode process, the current time setting process is executed (step S9077). In the current time setting process of step S9077, control for setting the current date and current time is performed. In this case, the setting information of the current date and the current time can be input based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, which is the operation performed by the attendant at the game arcade. For example, the hour signal indicating the time when the setting is input, the minute signal indicating the minute, the second signal indicating the second, the year signal indicating the year, the month signal indicating the month, the day signal indicating the day, and the day of the week signal indicating the day of the week, The CPU 90131 sequentially receives. It suffices that the setting of the current date and the current time measured by the RTC of the timer circuit 90135 can be changed by updating the stored information of the RTC in the timer circuit 90135 according to these received signals. In addition, by updating the storage information of the RTC 90201 provided in the backup memory board 9014 according to the input setting information, the setting of the current date and the current item measured by the RTC 90201 may be changed. When the current time setting process ends, the date and time information storing process is executed (step S9078). In the date/time information storage processing in step S9078, control is performed to store and store the date/time information in the temporary area of the external RAM 90122 or the internal RAM 90133 at a predetermined cycle (eg, every 100 milliseconds). The date and time information stored in the temporary area should be able to be stored as log information indicating the power cut date and time when the RAM clear notification command or the power failure recovery designation command is received from the main board 9011. After performing the effect control backup process (step S9079), the effect control timer interrupt process ends. In the production control backup process of step S9079, when preset backup conditions are satisfied, backup data indicating various log information is stored in the backup data memory 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory substrate 9014 in the log area provided. A storage process of storing and storing is executed. In this case, the log information to be stored may be information that includes a part or all of the operation history, the setting history, the error history, and the like regarding a plurality of electronic components used for games and effects in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Further, the log information may include date and time information indicating the stored date and time.

FIG. 18 shows an example of contents of a production control command transmitted for a game from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 to the production control microcomputer 90120 of the production control board 9012. In the following, the subscript H indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command that can be received by the effect control microcomputer 90120 has a 2-byte structure, the first byte is MODE data indicating the command classification, and the second byte is EXT data indicating the command type. The first bit (bit 7) of the high-order data (MODE data) of the effect control command is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the low-order data (EXT data) of the effect control command is always set to "0". To be done. The effect control command is not limited to the 2-byte structure, and a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used, for example. The production control command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 as the game progresses. The effect control microcomputer 90120 receives any of the effect control commands as the game progresses. As described above, the effect control command is a game effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 to the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 in accordance with the control related to the progress of the game. Is.

The fluctuation start command 80XXH specifies that fluctuation starts for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is a plurality of special symbols. XXH, which is the lower data (EXT data) of the variation start command, may be 01H at the variation start of the first special symbol and 02H at the variation start of the second special symbol, for example. The variation pattern designation command 81XXH designates the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 905 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. XXH, which is the lower data (EXT data) of the variation pattern designation command, indicates a value corresponding to the variation pattern. The display result designation command 8CXXH designates the display result of variable display. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the display result designation command, indicates a value corresponding to the display result of the variable display. The symbol confirmation command 8F00H specifies to end the fluctuation of the symbol. The RAM clear notification command 9000H notifies that the contents stored in the RAM 90102 have been cleared due to initialization by the game control microcomputer 90100 when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started by turning on the power. The setting change start command 9100H specifies the start of a setting change state in which the set value can be changed when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started by turning on the power. The power failure recovery designation command 9200H specifies execution of power failure recovery processing corresponding to power failure recovery. The setting change end command 93XXH specifies the end of the setting change state. In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. For example, the command 9300H specifies that the setting value is set to "1", the command 9301H specifies that the setting value is set to "2", and the command 9302H sets the setting value to "3". Specifies that it is set. Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H in which the EXT data is 00H is prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be specified by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, a setting value designation command for designating a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be prepared as an effect control command different from the setting change end command. The setting value designation command corresponds to the fluctuation start at each time of the special figure game in addition to the case where the setting change end command is transmitted, for example, when the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are transmitted. And may be transmitted. Further, for example, every time the fluctuation display is started ten times in the special figure game, the set value designation command may be transmitted as the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times. Instead of these or in addition to these, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. A setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the customer waiting demo designation command.

The setting confirmation start command 9400H designates the start of a setting confirmation state that enables confirmation of the set value when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started by powering on. The setting confirmation end command 9401H specifies the end of the setting confirmation state. The gaming state designation command 95XXH designates the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state, time saving state). And a second game state designation command corresponding to. The game control error designation command 96XXH designates the occurrence of an error (abnormality) relating to the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the type of the generated error (abnormality). In the game control error designation command, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to specify which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 9012 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) may be notified by an error notification process. The customer waiting demonstration designation command 9F00H designates display of a customer waiting demonstration screen (display of demo screen) such as display of effect image corresponding to stop of progress of game in customer waiting state. The hit start designation command A0XXH designates display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The special winning opening opening designation command A1XXH specifies that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. After the special winning opening opening designation command A2XXH, in the big hit game state or the small hit gaming state, it specifies the period during which the big winning opening changed from the open state to the closed state. The hit end designation command A3XXH designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The background designation command B0XXH designates the display state of the background screen according to the game state or the like. The first reserve storage number designation command C1XXH designates the first reserve storage number. The first reserved storage number is a variable display reserved number corresponding to the first special symbol display device 904A among the reserved storage numbers, and is any value of “0” to “4”, for example. The second reserve storage number designation command C2XXH designates the second reserve storage number. The second hold storage number is a variable display hold number corresponding to the second special symbol display device 904B among the hold storage numbers, and is, for example, any value of “0” to “4”. The prize determination result specification command C3XXH specifies the prize determination result. The winning determination result is a game when the first starting opening switch 9022A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening, or the second starting opening switch 9022B has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening. Whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" by using the numerical data indicating the game random number extracted from the game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 90104 or the RAM 90102 when the sphere is detected It shows the result of determination of, the result of determination of the variation pattern, and the like. That is, the winning determination result is a result of determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state or a specific variation pattern before determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state. The result of determining whether or not is shown.

FIG. 19 shows an example of contents of an effect control command which is a test command receivable by the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012. The production control command, which is a test command, also has a 2-byte structure like the production control command for games. The production control command serving as a test command has upper data (MODE data) set to any of F0H to F3H. These upper data (MODE data) are values that are not used in the game effect control command, and may be prepared in advance as a dedicated command for performing various inspections. Note that the test command is not limited to the 2-byte test command, and for example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used. The test command is not included in the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 as the game progresses. The test command is transmitted from the inspection device as an external device connected to the inspection connection part 90203 provided on the connectors 90150, 156 or the backup memory substrate 9014, for example, to the inspection connection part 90203. Based on the reception by the production control microcomputer 90120, the inspection process or the like corresponding to the received command can be executed. In this way, the production control command serving as the test command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 to the production control microcomputer 90120 on the production control board 9012 as the game progresses. Unlike the control command, it is a production control command for inspection that enables execution of inspection processing for performing various inspections.

The black screen display command F000H causes the image display device 905 to display a black screen for testing. The black screen for testing is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is black. The ROM check screen command F005H displays the execution result and version information of the inspection processing of various ROMs such as the external ROM 62AK120 on the screen of the image display device 905. The red display command F020H causes the image display device 905 to display a red screen, which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is red. The green display command F021H causes the image display device 905 to display a green screen, which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is green. The blue display command F022H causes the image display device 905 to display a blue screen, which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is blue. The white display command F023H causes the image display device 905 to display a white screen, which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is white. The black display command F024H causes the image display device 905 to display a black screen which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is black. The RTC value type designation command F1XXH designates the type of RTC value. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the RTC value type designation command, indicates a value corresponding to the type of RTC value, such as year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second. The RTC numerical value setting command F2XXH sets specific contents and numerical values for the type of RTC value specified by the RTC value type specifying command F1XXH. XXH which is the lower data (EXT data) of the RTC numerical value setting command indicates a value corresponding to a specific numerical value for the year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and corresponds to the day of the week from Sunday to Saturday. Indicates the value.

The check processing etc. designation command F3XXH designates execution of various kinds of check processing which are inspection processing. For example, XXH, which is the lower data (EXT data) of the check processing specification command, indicates a unique value that is different between one check processing and another check processing, or a value that is common to multiple types of check processing. There is a case. The check processing etc. designation command F3XXH constitutes a plurality of test commands, and if a combination of a plurality of test commands is received in a predetermined order, various check processing or the like to be an inspection processing can be executed. Good. In addition, a plurality of types of order are predetermined as the order of receiving a plurality of test commands that are predetermined corresponding to various check processes that are inspection processes, and the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received. It suffices to be able to execute different inspection processes and the like depending on the type of.

FIG. 20 shows a setting example of the reception order of test commands by the reception order list and the processing to be executed. As processes that can be executed by combining a plurality of test commands, backup clear, external RAM check (short), external RAM check (long), and backup inspection are prepared in advance. FIG. 20A shows the order of receiving a combination of a plurality of test commands when executing the backup clear process. FIG. 20B shows the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received when the external RAM check (short) process is executed. FIG. 20C shows the order of receiving a combination of a plurality of test commands when executing the external RAM check (long) process. FIG. 20D shows the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received when the backup inspection process is executed. In the reception order shown in FIGS. 20A to 20D, a combination of a plurality of test commands is received in an order from top to bottom, and when all the reception orders match, the corresponding process is executed.

The backup clear process is a process of initializing the storage content of backup data. The backup data is, for example, storage data of log areas provided in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory board 9014, and indicates various log information. The external RAM check (short) process and the external RAM check (long) process are inspection processes for checking whether or not data can be appropriately written and read in the storage area of the external RAM 90122. The external RAM check (short) process is a process that can be executed in a shorter time than the external RAM check (long) process, and may include any process content that is more simplified than the external RAM check (long) process. .. The backup inspection process is an inspection process executed based on the stored contents of backup data. In this case, the backup data read from the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D of the backup memory substrate 9014 may be output to the inspection device as an external device.

The external RAM check (short) process and the external RAM check (long) process are inspection processes that enable inspection of the state of an electronic component called the external RAM 90122. The backup inspection process is an inspection process that enables confirmation of information about various electronic components based on the stored content of backup data indicating log information. In this way, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 can execute the inspection process that enables or confirms the state of the electronic component by combining a plurality of test commands. The combination of a plurality of test commands according to the reception order is configured by a check processing etc. designation command in which all upper data (MODE data) of the reception command is F3H. In this way, the combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the inspection process is configured as a combination of the effect control commands for inspection different from the effect control commands for game received as the game progresses. .. Therefore, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component is not executed based on the reception of the game production control command. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component from being erroneously executed based on the game production control command received as the game progresses, and perform an appropriate inspection. You can Further, for example, since the possibility that the inspection process is erroneously executed during the progress of the game is reduced, the trouble caused by misunderstanding that the game machine is damaged due to the incorrect execution of the inspection process is prevented, It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player due to the interruption and improve the reliability of the inspection process.

The combination of the plurality of test commands received when executing the backup clear process includes the command that becomes F311H among the check process specification commands. The combination of the plurality of test commands received when the external RAM check (short) process is executed includes the command of F312H among the check process specifying commands. The combination of the plurality of test commands received when executing the external RAM check (long) process includes the command that becomes F313H among the check process specifying commands. The combination of the plurality of test commands received when the backup inspection process is executed includes the command of F314H among the commands for specifying the check process and the like. None of these commands is included in the combination of a plurality of test commands received when executing other processing. In this way, the combination of multiple test commands received to execute a specific inspection process does not include the unique test command that is not included in the combination of multiple test commands received to execute another inspection process. May be included. For example, when the command to be F303H or the command to be F304H out of the designated commands such as the check process is to be executed, any of the backup clear process, external RAM clear (short) process, external RAM clear (long) process, and backup inspection process Even included in the combination of multiple test commands received. As described above, the combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the specific inspection process includes the common test command included in the combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the other inspection process. You can leave. In addition, for example, the command that becomes F37FH among the check processing specification commands is the last received test command in the combination of the plurality of received test commands, regardless of which processing is executed. In this way, the test command received last in the combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the specific inspection process is the last test in the combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the other inspection process. It may be the same command as the received test command. Note that the first received test command in a combination of a plurality of test commands is not limited to a unique command, and at least one received in a common order in a combination of a plurality of test commands corresponding to a plurality of types of inspection processing. Partial test commands may be unique commands. Further, the test command received last in a combination of a plurality of test commands is not limited to a common command, and at least one received in a common order in a combination of a plurality of test commands corresponding to a plurality of types of inspection processing. Partial test commands may be common commands. The combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the inspection process may be configured as a combination of a larger number of commands than the game effect control commands received as the game progresses. In this case, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component is not executed by the number of effect control commands received for the game. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component from being erroneously executed based on the game production control command received as the game progresses, and perform an appropriate inspection. You can Further, for example, since the possibility that the inspection process is erroneously executed during the progress of the game is reduced, the trouble caused by misunderstanding that the game machine is damaged due to the incorrect execution of the inspection process is prevented, It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player due to the interruption and improve the reliability of the inspection process. As a combination of a plurality of test commands, there are a plurality of types in the order of receiving the test commands. Then, as an inspection process such as an external RAM check (short) process, an external RAM check (long) process, and a backup inspection process, different processes can be executed depending on the type of the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received. .. Also, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component differs depending on the combination of a plurality of test commands. As a result, various inspection processes for inspecting the state of the electronic component can be executed and appropriate inspection can be performed.

In the production control backup process executed in step S9079 of the production control timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not a preset backup condition is satisfied. Then, when it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied, the backup process for storing and storing the backup target data according to the satisfied backup condition is executed. As the backup condition, a plurality of different conditions may be set according to the occurrence of events including various changes and settings in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The backup control table indicating a plurality of backup conditions may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (a program management area or the like) provided in one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132, for example. The backup target data may include different data depending on the backup condition. Alternatively, the backup target data may include data common to a plurality of backup conditions. Regardless of which backup condition is satisfied, backup target data indicating log information including date and time information may be stored. As a backup method for storing the data to be backed up, a batch backup and a split backup may be prepared. In the case of a batch backup, the backup target data for one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on the occurrence of one timer interrupt for effect control. In the case of divided backup, the backup target data for one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on a plurality of timer interrupts for effect control.

The backup process for storing and storing the data to be backed up according to the backup condition is performed every time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed, when the backup condition is satisfied in the effect control backup process in step S9079. It may be executable or may be collectively executable when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped. When it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied in the production control backup process when the backup process is collectively executed when the power is cut off, for example, a backup indicating log information including date and time information is provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 90122. The target data is stored.

FIG. 21 shows a setting example of the backup control table 120T that provides a plurality of backup conditions and the like. The backup control table 120T is configured such that a backup condition, a backup method, a division method, a storage area bit number, a multiplicity, and a verification method can be set for each backup target data indicating the contents of the log information. When the backup method is split backup, "automatic" or "every 100 KB" can be designated as the split method. The division method is a method or method for dividing the backup target data when executing the division backup, and it is sufficient that the number of divisions and the data capacity at the time of division can be specified. For example, when the division method is “automatic”, the number of divisions is determined every time the backup process is executed according to the data capacity of the backup target data. Alternatively, the number of divisions and the data capacity at the time of division may be determined depending on the processing load on the effect control board 9012 or the backup memory board 9014. The storage area bit number is a processing unit of storage data in a log area which is a storage area for storing log information in the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D provided on the backup memory substrate 9014, and in this example, indicates 8 bits. "8" or "3" indicating 3 bits can be designated. The multiplicity is a degree of mirroring in which backup target data indicating the same log information is distributed and stored while overlapping in different log areas, and whether or not the data is mirrored for storage and storage in the case of mirroring are stored. The number of times can be specified. For example, when the multiplicity is “1”, mirroring is not performed and backup target data indicating the same log information is stored and backed up only once. When the multiplicity is “2”, mirroring is performed twice, and backup target data indicating the same log information is stored twice in different storage areas for backup. When the multiplicity is “3”, mirroring is performed three times, and backup target data indicating the same log information is stored in different storage areas three times for backup. By increasing the multiplicity, it is possible to improve redundancy (availability) and enhance reliability of stored data.

The verification method that can be set for each backup target data is a method that verifies whether the backup process, which is the storage process of the backup target data, was performed correctly, and specifies whether or not to make a judgment by majority with error detection. It is possible. If the verification method is error detection, when the backup target data is read from the log area, any error detection process using parity, checksum, or hash value is executed to verify the correctness of the stored data. I wish I could. If the verification method is majority decision with error detection, error detection processing using parity, checksum or hash value, etc., and multiple log areas in which backup target data indicating the same log information multiplexed by mirroring are stored Compare stored data. As a result of this comparison, if the stored contents match in a predetermined number of log areas among the plurality of log areas, it is only necessary to determine that the backup processing has been performed correctly and to verify the validity of the stored data. For example, when the parities, checksums, or hash values calculated from the storage data in a plurality of log areas match, it can be determined that the backup processing has been correctly performed for each log area. If the parity, checksum, or hash value calculated from the storage data in multiple log areas do not match, and if the number of log areas for which the same parity, checksum, or hash value is calculated is the majority, It may be determined that the log area has been backed up correctly (judgment by majority). The “predetermined number of log areas” that is a condition for determining that backup processing has been performed correctly is not limited to a majority of log areas, and is a preset fixed value (such as “2”) regardless of the multiplicity. It may be a variable value determined according to the multiplicity, the backup method, the division method, or the like. Instead of the majority decision, it may be determined that the backup process is correctly performed when the execution result of the error detection process first becomes normal.

Data to be backed up is system data, production control error data, player history data, received command data, setting value change time data, power saving setting data, current time change data, power cut time data, store name setting data, production output amount. Data and performance history data are included. Note that the backup target data may include some of these. The system data only needs to include effect control data stored in a predetermined area (effect control data holding area or the like) provided in the external RAM 90122 or the internal RAM 90133. The effect control error data is data indicating an error that occurs during execution of effect control. The player history data is data regarding the player acquired by the pachinko gaming machine 901. The received command data is data indicating the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. The set value change time data is data indicating the date and time when the set value was changed. The set value change time data may include data indicating the date and time when the set value is confirmed, or the set value check time data may be generated separately from the set value change time data. The power saving setting data is data related to power saving control that can be set by an attendant of the game arcade. The power saving control is set, for example, by operating the knob of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to operate the power saving function setting screen when the image display device 905 displays the power saving function setting screen. It suffices if it is possible to change the presence or absence of the function and the type (power saving mode). Alternatively, when a test command for power saving setting is input, a power saving function setting screen may be displayed on the image display device 905 so that the presence or absence of the power saving function and the function (power saving mode) can be changed. The current time change data is data indicating that the setting of the current date and time measured by the RTC has been changed. The setting of the current date and time measured by the RTC may be one or both of the setting of the RTC included in the timer circuit 90135 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the setting of the RTC 90201 provided in the backup memory board 9014. Good. The power-off time data is data indicating the date and time when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 was stopped. The store name setting data is data indicating the setting of a store name that can be set by a staff member of a game hall or the like. The effect output amount data is data indicating the setting of the output amount such as the volume and the light emission amount that can be set by the player or the like. The effect history data is data indicating a history of effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In addition, the number of rotations that indicates the number of times variable display is performed from a specific timing, the number of big hits that indicates the number of big hits counted for each type of big hit, the number of consecutive chans that indicates the number of big hits that have occurred without being controlled to the normal state, and the player. Optional information according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the progress of control, such as performance customization indicating the character selection contents and performance theme of the performance image set by, the mission achievement status indicating the achievement status of a predetermined mission, etc. It suffices if the data indicating the can be stored as backup target data.

The backup condition that can be set for each piece of data to be backed up may be any occurrence condition of an event that can occur with the progress of a game or production, such as setting, control, determination, and detection in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the production control backup process executed in step S9079 of the production control timer interrupt process, it is set in advance in accordance with the processing result by the control device or the processing device such as the CPU 90131 or the VDP 90140 of the production control microcomputer 90120. It may be determined whether or not any of the backup conditions is satisfied. For example, in the error notification process executed in step S9075, by determining the reception result of the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or by determining various detection results, When an error related to the included electronic component occurs, control for notifying the error is performed. In this case, in the production control backup process, it is determined that the backup condition at the time of error occurrence is satisfied, and production control error data is created. In this way, when it is determined in the production control backup process that the backup condition is satisfied, the control signal corresponding to the backup command for production control backup is transmitted to the backup memory board 9014. The backup command for backup during production control may include the backup target data. When the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory substrate 9014 receives the backup command for production control backup, it may execute the writing process of the log information including the backup target data using the date and time information acquired from the RTC 90201. By storing the error information regarding the electronic components including the rendering device, it becomes easy to identify the defect and improve the performance.

The effect control backup process is executed in step S9079 of the effect control timer interrupt process based on the occurrence of the effect control timer interrupt. Then, when the occurrence condition of the event corresponding to the processing result by the control device or the processing device such as the CPU 90131 or the VDP 90140 is satisfied, the backup condition set for each backup target data regarding the plurality of electronic components including the rendering device is satisfied. Backup processing is executed to store the backup target data. As described above, when the event occurrence condition relating to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied, and when the event occurrence condition corresponding to the processing result of the control device or the processing device such as the CPU 90131 or the VDP 90140 is satisfied, the log area or the like is stored. It is possible to execute a writing process for writing and storing information regarding a plurality of electronic components in the area.

The backup condition that can be set for each backup target data may include a write condition that is different from the event occurrence condition corresponding to a plurality of electronic components. For example, for the player history data, the backup condition is satisfied when the data related to the player is updated, regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components has occurred. With respect to the received command data, the backup condition may be satisfied when the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received, even when an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components does not occur. With respect to the store name setting data, the backup condition is satisfied when the name of the store corresponding to the game arcade is set regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. The system data is stored regardless of whether the backup condition is satisfied at the time of updating the data due to the occurrence of an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components or whether the event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components occurs. The backup condition may be met when updating data. In this way, even when the backup condition as the writing condition different from the occurrence condition of the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied, the backup process of storing the backup target data is executed. When a writing condition different from such a generation condition is satisfied, a writing process for writing and storing game-related information different from information regarding a plurality of electronic components in a storage area such as a log area. Can be executed. When an event corresponding to a defect in an electronic component occurs, backup data including game-related information is stored, so it is possible to easily specify the relationship between the progress of a game or performance and the defect in the electronic component. It is possible to easily grasp the situation of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

When the data to be backed up is the production control error data, the backup condition is not limited to the case where the error occurs only, and the backup condition including the time when the error is recovered may be set. For example, in the error notification process executed in step S9075, by determining the reception result of the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or by determining various detection results, When an error related to the included electronic component occurs, control for notifying the error is performed. In this case, in the production control backup process, it is determined that the backup condition at the time of error occurrence is satisfied, and production control error data is created. After that, when no error is detected in the electronic component that is the target of the error notification, it is determined that the error has been recovered. Even at the time of error recovery by such determination, it is possible to determine that the backup condition is satisfied in the production control backup process and create the production control error recovery data. The production control error recovery data thus created is included in the backup command for production control backup and is transmitted to the backup memory substrate 9014, similarly to the production control error data. When the memory controller 90200 of the backup memory substrate 9014 receives the backup command for production control backup, it may execute the writing process of the log information including the backup target data using the date and time information acquired from the RTC 90201. In addition to production control error data, production control error recovery data can also be stored as backup data, so that a history of error occurrence and recovery relating to production control can be stored for subsequent ex-post verification, and pachinko gaming machine 901 The situation of can be grasped easily.

In the power-on information processing in step S9023 of the effect control main processing, a backup restoration processing for restoring the setting and control based on the log information stored in the log area may be executed. In the backup restoration processing, verification may be performed by a verification method according to the backup target data, and it may be determined whether or not the stored data is normal. For example, when the verification method is a majority decision with error detection, if the execution result of the error detection process is normal in a predetermined number of log areas among a plurality of log areas in which backup target data indicating the same log information is stored, It is determined that the stored data is normal. In this way, if the stored data is normal, a data recovery process using the stored data in the log area is performed. On the other hand, when the stored data is not normal, the initial value setting using the initial data different from the stored data in the log area is performed. The initial data may be, for example, data stored in one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132 and used when the initialization process is executed in step S9021 of the game control main process. As a result, even if the backup target data cannot be stored correctly, it is possible to set the initial value using the initial data according to the recovery from the power failure. Instead of the initial data, special data corresponding to the case where the stored data is not normal may be used. Unlike the initial data, the special data may be data that is suitable for restoring settings and controls. Depending on the backup target data determined that the stored data is not normal, whether to use the initial data or the special data may be different. For example, if the backup target data is system data, if it is determined that the stored data is not normal, data recovery using special data is performed. On the other hand, if the backup target data is the effect output amount data, when it is determined that the stored data is not normal, data restoration using the initial data is performed. Whether to use the initial data or the special data is set in advance based on the update frequency of the backup target data, the update data amount, the importance of the data, the target component, the target control, a combination of some or all of these, and the like. It only has to be decided. The backup restoration process may be executable when a preset data restoration condition is satisfied in the production control backup process. The data recovery condition may be satisfied, for example, when a power failure recovery designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received.

In the production control backup process, it may be determined whether or not the backup memory substrate 9014 is connected to the production control substrate 9012. In this case, the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 90154 may be determined. Depending on the determination result of the connection state, whether or not to execute the storage process may be different, or the storage process with different contents may be executed. For example, when the backup memory board 9014 is not connected to the effect control board 9012, the storage process of storing and storing the log information in the log area is not executed. In this way, a limit may be set as a limit that storage processing is not executed in a range where a preset limit condition that the backup memory substrate 9014 is not connected to the effect control substrate 9012 is satisfied. On the other hand, it is sufficient that the storage process can be executed in a range in which the backup memory substrate 9014 is connected to the effect control substrate 9012 and the restriction condition is not satisfied. As storage processing of different contents, when the backup memory board 9014 is not connected to the effect control board 9012, a storage area for storing and storing backup data indicating various log information using a predetermined area of the external RAM 90122 as a log area. Processing may be performed. In this case, the data capacity to be stored as backup target data may be reduced as compared with the case where the backup memory board 9014 is connected to the effect control board 9012. For example, the production control error data and the received command data become backup target data, and when the backup condition is satisfied, the storage process of storing the log information is executed, while the system data and the player history data are not the backup target data. Alternatively, the storage process for storing the log information may not be executed even if the backup condition is satisfied. In this way, in the range where the preset memory board 9014 is not connected to the effect control board 9012 and the preset restriction condition is satisfied, a limit is set as a limit to reduce the data capacity stored by the storage processing. May be. On the other hand, in a range in which the backup memory board 9014 is connected to the effect control board 9012 and the restriction condition is not satisfied, the data capacity to be stored by the storage processing is not reduced and the backup corresponding to all the backup conditions is performed. The target data may be stored and stored. The processing is not limited to the storage processing, and for any processing or control in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a limit may be set as a limit that a specific processing or control is not executed within a range where a preset restriction condition is satisfied. Alternatively, a limit may be set as a limit that the processing amount and the control amount are reduced as compared with the range in which the limiting condition is not satisfied.

22 and 23 show a specific example of displaying the maintenance history screen. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the setting confirmation processing is executed in step S905 of the game control main processing, and when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the main board 9011 is set to the effect control board 9012. A confirmation start command is transmitted. Upon receiving this setting confirmation start command, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120, as shown in FIG. 22(A), for example, when the maintenance mode process is executed in step S9078 of the effect control timer interrupt process. Displays the setting confirmation. In the setting confirmation display, a character display such as "setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 905. The setting confirmation display includes a character display such as "Press the push button to switch to the maintenance mode" on the image display device 905. Thus, in the setting confirmation display, a display prompting an operation for shifting to the maintenance mode is performed. At this time, when it is detected that an attendant of the game arcade or a person in charge of the manufacturer presses the push button 9031B, the image display device 905 displays a maintenance mode menu screen as shown in FIG. Enter maintenance mode. On the maintenance mode menu screen, choices of "maintenance history", "setting change/confirmation history", and "current time setting" are displayed, and the current time is also displayed.

When the “Maintenance history” option 012IW106 is selected on the maintenance mode menu screen, the image display device 905 switches to the maintenance history screen display as shown in FIG. On the maintenance history screen, the date and time and the log contents are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed in order so as to be ranked higher. As an example, a VDP error indicating that an abnormal internal state has occurred in the VDP 90140, an illegal prize winning error indicating that an illegal prize is detected at a winning hole such as a first special winning opening or a second special winning opening, a count switch Each log information of a switch abnormality error indicating that an abnormality of various switches such as 9023 is detected, a prize ball abnormality error indicating that a prize ball abnormality is detected, a magnet error indicating that an abnormal magnetism is detected, and a probability change failure not established. The log information indicating that is detected is displayed. When the maintenance history screen has a plurality of pages, when the next page is selected, the screen shifts to the second page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. In this case, the log information of the start of setting change and the end of setting change, the log information of the power cut date and the power-on date and time, and the log information of the left-handed notification and the full tank notification are displayed. If there is a next page, the next page selection operation causes the screen to shift to the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. At this time, the log information indicating the start of setting confirmation and the end of setting confirmation, the log information indicating that the current time is set during the maintenance mode during the setting confirmation, and the log indicating that the RAM clearing by the initialization process has been executed. Information is displayed. When the operation of selecting the next page is further performed, the screen shifts to the fourth page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. Here, the log information of the RWM abnormality error indicating that some kind of RAM abnormality has occurred when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned on, and the log information of the power-off date and time and the power-on date and time corresponding to the date and time after that are displayed. .. According to these log information, since the RWM abnormal error has occurred, the clerk at the game arcade once turns off the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 and then turns on the clear switch to turn on the power again and execute the initialization process. It can be confirmed afterwards that the RAM has been cleared. Further, CPU exception event log information indicating that an exception event has occurred in the CPU 90131, and log information of power cutoff date and power-on date and time corresponding to a later date and time are displayed. Due to the CPU exception event generated by these log information, the staff at the game arcade stopped the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901, but when the power was turned on the next day, the CPU exception event no longer occurred. You can confirm that afterwards.

Note that, on the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 23(E), the log information indicating that the current time has been set indicates a time earlier than the log information indicating that the setting confirmation has started. Log information is displayed. For example, the setting confirmation is started at 09:36:28 on 2018/03/21 (Wednesday), whereas the setting of the current time is 09:36: on 2018/03/21 (Wednesday). It is supposed to be 16. As described above, the inconsistency of the date and time before and after the setting of the current time occurs because the date and time information after the setting is read and the log information is recorded when the current time is set. In this example, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information is generated, and the log information is displayed in the order in which the log information is generated even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting.

In addition to displaying the maintenance history screen, or instead of displaying the maintenance history screen, a two-dimensional bar code may be displayed on the image display device 905 so that log information can be acquired. For example, a two-dimensional barcode displayed on the image display device 905 is photographed using a photographing device connected to the inspection device. Log information can be provided to the inspection apparatus by capturing such a two-dimensional barcode. In addition, the log information may be output using any output method such as display output, wireless output, infrared output, audio output, ultrasonic output, or a combination of some or all of these. The information output is not limited to log information, and any information output can be performed using any output method such as display output, wireless output, infrared output, audio output, ultrasonic output, or a combination of some or all of these. I wish I had it.

The log information that can be displayed on the maintenance history screen may be all of the log information shown in the backup data or a part of the log information shown in the backup data. For example, on the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of an event that can be established according to the internal state of the control device, such as an exceptional event of the CPU 90131, can be displayed. Further, on the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of an event that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the processing device, such as an error interrupt request of the VDP 90140, can be displayed. On the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of a specific event that can be established according to the processing result by the CPU 90131, such as when an error occurs in the backup process during production control, when the time is changed, and when the power is turned on again, can be displayed. Is. On the other hand, on the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to the occurrence conditions of events other than specific events such as data update of player history data in backup control during production control, determination of power saving setting, name setting do not do. As described above, the log information stored as backup data may include log information that is not displayed on the maintenance history screen. Alternatively, log information that is not displayed on the normal maintenance history screen but can be displayed on the special maintenance history screen may be provided. The special maintenance screen may be displayed according to an arbitrary detection result such as a detection result of a predetermined operation on the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B. In this case, the operation procedure for the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B is not notified to the staff at the game arcade and may be recognized by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The present invention is not limited to the detection result, and any special maintenance history screen can be displayed according to arbitrary control or processing. In this way, a limit may be set as a limit that the log is not displayed on the maintenance history screen in the range of the specific type of log information among the plurality of types of log information. The log information other than the specific type may be displayed on the maintenance history screen. Alternatively, within a range of a specific type of log information among a plurality of types of log information, a limit may be set as a limit that it can be displayed only on a special maintenance history screen and is not displayed on a normal maintenance history screen.

FIG. 24 shows a specific example in which a setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode. In response to the detection of the operation of pressing the push button 9031B by the staff of the game arcade or the person in charge of the manufacturer when the setting confirmation display as shown in FIG. 24(A) is displayed, FIG. The maintenance mode menu screen as shown in is displayed. Then, the option 012IW107 of "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and operated. In this case, the image display device 905 switches to the display of the setting change/confirmation history screen as shown in FIG. On the setting change/confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether the setting is changed or confirmed, and the changed setting value or the confirmed setting value are displayed in association with each other so that the latest log information is at the top. They are displayed in order. If the “current time setting” option is selected and operated while the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed, the image display device 905 switches to displaying the current time setting screen. On the current time setting screen, year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, or second items are selected by tilting left and right of the stick controller 9031A, and numbers for each item are selected by tilting operation of the stick controller 9031A before and after. To be done. After the current time setting screen is displayed, when the staff member of the game arcade or the person in charge of the manufacturer presses the push button 9031B, the current date and time is set to the currently displayed date and time.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 41AK)
FIG. 25 shows an example of executing a backup process for the characteristic part 41AK. In this case, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes the program read from one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132, so that the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 and the occurrence event information creation processing units 41AKM21 to 41AKM23. It has a function. In addition, a writing flag 41AKF1 and a backup data buffer 41AKB1 are provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 90122 or the internal RAM 90133. The backup data buffer 41AKB1 includes a plurality of buffer areas including buffer areas 41AKB11 to 41AKB13. Backup data memories 90210A to 90210C of the backup memory substrate 9014 are provided with backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The backup storage unit 41AKA1 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13 as log areas. The backup storage unit 41AKA2 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 41AKA21 to 41AKA23 as log areas. The backup storage unit 41AKA3 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 41AKA31 to 41AKA33 as log areas.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM21 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the CPU internal error 41AKC1. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the exceptional backup process in step S9042 of the CPU exceptional event occurrence process, and is data indicating log information including exceptional event information. Good. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM22 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the backup process at the time of error interrupt in step S9052 of the VDP error interrupt process, and may be data indicating log information including VDP error information. Good. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM23 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the production control error determination 41AKC3. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the effect control backup processing in step S9079 of the effect control timer interrupt processing, and is data indicating log information including effect control error data. If The backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing units 41AKM21 to 41AKM23 is temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1 in the order of creation. For example, the backup data created first is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB11, the backup data created next is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB12, and the backup data created subsequently is written in the buffer area 41AKB13. Stored.

When there is backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1, the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 reads and acquires the backup data. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this execution example, the same backup data is distributed and stored overlappingly in the three backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3 in correspondence with the multiplicity of "3". For example, the backup data read from the buffer area 41AKB11 of the backup data buffer 41AKB1 and acquired is the backup storage area 41AKA11 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area 41AKA21 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA31 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. It is stored by copying and writing. At the start of writing backup data to the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3, the writing flag 41AKF1 is set to the ON state. At the end of the writing of the backup data, the writing flag 41AKF1 is cleared and turned off. When the writing flag 41AKF1 is off, the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 permits writing of new backup data, and reads the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1. On the other hand, when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on, the writing of new backup data is prohibited, and the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1 is not read.

For example, when the backup data read from the buffer area 41AKB11 of the backup data buffer 41AKB1 and acquired is written to the log area and the writing flag 41AKF1 is turned off, the backup data temporarily stored in the next buffer area 41AKB12. Can be read. The backup data read and acquired at this time is copied and written in the backup storage area 41AKA12 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area AKA22 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA32 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. Remembered. When the writing in the log area is completed in this way and the writing flag 41AKF1 is turned off, the backup data temporarily stored in the next buffer area 41AKB13 can be read. In this case, the backup data read and acquired should be copied and written in the backup storage area 41AKA13 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area 41AKA23 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA33 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. Remembered in.

The backup storage unit 41AKA1 is provided as one continuous storage area by, for example, assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13. The backup storage unit 41AKA2 is provided as one continuous storage area, for example, by assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA21 to 41AKA23. The backup storage unit 41AKA3 is provided as one continuous storage area, for example, by assigning consecutive addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA31 to 41AKA33. When the writing flag 41AKF1 is on, writing of new backup data is prohibited. As a result, if the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied among the occurrence conditions of the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components and the backup data writing process corresponding to one of the conditions is being executed, , The backup data write process corresponding to the other condition is not executed.

For example, if the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied and the backup data writing process corresponding to the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is being executed, the writing flag 41AKF1 must be ON. Accordingly, the backup data write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is not executed. Alternatively, if the conditions for the occurrence of the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied and the backup data write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is being executed, the writing flag 41AKF1 is turned on. In response to this, the write processing of the backup data corresponding to the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is not executed. Which writing process is executed first may be determined according to the backup data creation order. When the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 and the effect control error judgment 41AKC3 are satisfied, or when the effect control error judgment 41AKC3 and the CPU internal error 41AKC1 are satisfied, the writing process is similarly executed. You can control it. As described above, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the range in which the backup data write process corresponding to one condition is being executed is the limit that the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition is not executed. As a limit is set. As long as the backup data write process corresponding to one condition is not being executed, the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition can be executed.

The order of creating the backup data may be determined according to the processing priority of the effect control microcomputer 90120. For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied, the priority of the CPU exception event occurrence processing is higher than the priority of the VDP error interrupt processing, and therefore the occurrence event information creation processing unit. The backup data created by the 41AKM 21 may be executed before the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 41AKM22. When the occurrence conditions of the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 and the effect control error determination 41AKC3 are satisfied, the priority of the VDP error interrupt process is higher than the priority of the effect control timer interrupt process, so that the event information is created. The creation of backup data by the processing unit 41AKM22 may be executed before the creation of backup data by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM23.

The condition for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control device such as an exceptional event of the CPU 90131. The generation condition of the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the processing device such as the error interrupt request of the VDP 90140. The occurrence condition of the production control error determination 41AKC3 can be established according to a processing result by the CPU 90131, such as a determination when an error occurs in the production control backup process. Therefore, when the conditions for the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied, the backup data writing process can be executed with priority over the condition for the production control error determination 41AKC3. become.

For example, when the occurrence conditions of the CPU internal error 41AKC1 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those occurrence conditions are met, and the writing process can be executed in the order of the backup data creation. When the occurrence conditions of the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those occurrence conditions are met, and the writing process can be executed in the order of the backup data creation. When the occurrence conditions of the production control error determination 41AKC3 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which the occurrence conditions are met, and the writing process can be executed in the order of the backup data creation. In these cases, the writing is prohibited when the writing flag 41AKF1 is ON, so that if the writing process corresponding to the previous generation condition is being executed, the writing corresponding to the next generation condition is performed. Do not execute embedded processing. As described above, when the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied multiple times among the occurrence conditions of the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components, the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed. Then, a limit is set as a limit that the writing process corresponding to the next generation condition is not executed. As long as the writing process corresponding to the previous generation condition is not being executed, the writing process corresponding to the next generation condition may be executed.

When a plurality of generating conditions are satisfied, whether or not any one of the writing processes is executed may be determined according to the order in which the generating conditions are satisfied. For example, when another generating condition is satisfied during execution of the writing process corresponding to the generating condition that is satisfied first, the writing process corresponding to the generating condition that is satisfied later may not be executed. Alternatively, whether or not to execute any of the writing processes may be determined according to the processing priority when a plurality of generating conditions are satisfied. For example, when the occurrence conditions of the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied at the same time, the processing priority of the CPU exception event occurrence processing is higher than the processing priority of the VDP error interrupt processing. The write process corresponding to the error 41AKC1 may be executed, and the write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 may not be executed. In addition, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the overwrite process according to the process priority may be executed. For example, when the occurrence conditions of the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied at the same time, the processing priority of the CPU exception event occurrence processing is higher than the processing priority of the VDP error interrupt processing. The writing process corresponding to the error 41AKC1 may be executed as an overwriting process for overwriting the stored data by the writing process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2.

When a plurality of backup conditions are satisfied as a plurality of occurrence conditions, the creation order of backup data and whether or not to execute a writing process may be determined according to the content of the backup target data. For example, if the backup condition at the time of an error that the backup target data is the production control error data and the backup condition at the time of receiving the command that the backup target data is the received command data are satisfied at the same time, the backup condition at the time of the error occurrence It is also possible to execute the writing process corresponding to (1) and the writing process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of receiving the command later. Alternatively, the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the error occurs may be executed, and the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the command is received may not be executed. In this case, the information regarding the defect of the electronic component including the rendering device is preferentially stored, so that the possibility of appropriately dealing with the defect of the electronic component is increased. Alternatively, the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the command is received may be executed first, and the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the error occurs may be executed later. Further, the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the command is received may be executed, and the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the error occurs may not be executed. In this case, since the information regarding the reception status of the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 is preferentially stored, the possibility of being able to appropriately deal with the problem of the control regarding the game is increased.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 42AK)
FIG. 26 shows an example of executing a backup process for the characteristic part 42AK. In this case, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes the program read from one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132, so that the memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 and the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 to 42AKM21 to It has the function of 42AKM23. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210C of the backup memory substrate 9014 are provided with the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13, the backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23, and the backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33. The backup storage unit 42AKA11 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA111 to 42AKA113 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA12 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA13 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA131 to 42AKA133 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA21 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA21 to 42AKA213 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA22 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA23 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA231 to 42AKA233 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA31 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA31 to 42AKA313 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA32 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA33 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA331 to 42AKA333 as log areas.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the CPU internal error 42AKC1. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the exceptional backup process in step S9042 of the CPU exceptional event occurrence process, and is data indicating log information including exceptional event information. Good. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM22 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the backup process at the time of error interrupt in step S9052 of the VDP error interrupt process, and may be data indicating log information including VDP error information. Good. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM23 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the production control error determination 42AKC3. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the effect control backup processing in step S9079 of the effect control timer interrupt processing, and is data indicating log information including effect control error data. If The backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing units 42AKM21 to 42AKM23 can be stored in parallel in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3.

The memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The memory writing processing unit 42AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The memory writing processing unit 42AKM13 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM23. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3.

Also in this execution example, the multiplicity corresponds to "3". The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 is redundantly distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13. The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM22 is redundantly distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23. The same backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 42AKA23 is stored in the three backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33 in a distributed manner while overlapping. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 42AKA111 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA121 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA131 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. , Is stored by copying and writing. The backup data acquired next from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 42AKA112 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA122 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA132 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. It is stored by copying and writing. The backup data further acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 includes the backup storage area 42AKA113 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA123 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, the backup storage area 42AKA133 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13, and the like. It is stored by copying and writing.

In the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13 and the backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23, for example, different addresses are assigned between the backup storage areas 42AKA111 to 42AKA113 and the backup storage areas 42AKA21 to 42AKA213, and the backup storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123 and the backup storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123. Different addresses are assigned to the storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223, and different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas AKA131 to 42AKA133 and the backup storage areas 42AKA231 to 42AKA233 to provide different storage areas. In the backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23 and the backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33, for example, different addresses are assigned between the backup storage areas 42AKA21 to 42AKA213 and the backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313, and the backup storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223 are backed up. Different addresses are assigned to the storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323, and different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas AKA231 to 42AKA233 and the backup storage areas 42AKA331 to 42AKA333 to provide different storage areas. In the backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33 and the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13, for example, different addresses are allocated between the backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313 and the backup storage areas 42AKA111 to 42AKA113, and the backup storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323 and the backup storage areas 42AKA11 to 42AKA13. Different addresses are assigned to the storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123, and different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas AKA331 to 42AKA333 and the backup storage areas 42AKA131 to 42AKA133 to provide different storage areas. Note that different storage areas may be provided by using physically different storage devices. The memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 can execute backup data write processing in parallel with each other. As a result, when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition among the occurrence conditions of the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components are satisfied, while the backup data writing process corresponding to one condition is being executed, the other condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute backup data write processing corresponding to the conditions.

For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 are satisfied, the memory write processing unit 42AKM11 is executing the backup data write processing corresponding to the CPU internal error 42AKC1 even while the memory write processing unit 42AKM12 is executing. Can execute the write processing of the backup data corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. When the conditions for occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 and the effect control error determination 42AKC3 are satisfied, the memory write processing unit 42AKM12 executes the memory write process even while the backup data write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 is being executed. The part 42AKM13 can execute the writing process of the backup data corresponding to the error determination during production control 42AKC3. When the conditions for producing the error determination during production control 42AKC3 and the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are satisfied, the memory writing processing unit 42AKM13 performs the memory writing process even while the backup data writing process corresponding to the during production control error determination 42AKC3 is being executed. The unit 42AKM11 can execute the writing process of the backup data corresponding to the CPU internal error 42AKC. In this way, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition can be executed even within the range where the backup data write process corresponding to the one condition is being executed. I wish I could. As long as the backup data write process corresponding to one condition is not being executed, it is naturally enough that the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition can be executed.

The condition for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 can be established according to the internal state of the control device such as an exceptional event of the CPU 90131. The generation condition of the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the processing device, such as the error interrupt request of the VDP 90140. The generation condition of the production control error determination 42AKC3 can be established according to a processing result by the CPU 90131, such as a determination when an error occurs in the production control backup process. Therefore, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 are satisfied, the backup data writing process can be executed with priority over the case where the condition for the production control error determination 42AKC3 is satisfied. May become. For example, when the backup data is created, the creation order is determined according to the processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 90120, so that the backup data write processing by the memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 is also created in the creation order. It may be executed with the following priority.

FIG. 27 shows an example of execution of the backup processing relating to the characteristic part 42AK, which is different from the case of FIG. In this execution example, when the occurrence conditions of the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which the occurrence conditions are met, and the write processing can be executed in the backup data creation order. .. In this case, a writing flag 42AKF1 and a backup data buffer 42AKB1 are provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 90122 or the internal RAM 90133. The backup data buffer 42AKB1 includes a plurality of buffer areas including buffer areas 42AKB11 to 42AKB13. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 creates backup data in the order in which the CPU internal error 42AKC1 occurs. For example, when the occurrence conditions of the CPU internal errors X1 to Xn corresponding to n times are satisfied as the CPU internal errors 42AKC1 of a plurality of times, the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 causes the backup data Y1 corresponding to the occurrence conditions of each time. ~Yn are created and temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. For example, the backup data created first is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB11, the backup data created next is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB12, and the backup data created subsequently is written in the buffer area 42AKB13. Stored. When there is backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1, the memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 reads and acquires this. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13. At the start of writing backup data to the log area, the writing flag 42AKF1 is set to the ON state. At the end of the writing of the backup data, the writing flag 42AKF1 is cleared and turned off. When the writing flag 42AKF1 is off, the memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 permits writing of new backup data, and reads the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. On the other hand, when the writing flag 42AKF1 is ON, writing of new backup data is prohibited, and the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1 is not read.

Even if the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 occurrence conditions are met multiple times, the backup data may be created in the order in which those occurrence conditions are met, and the writing process may be executed in the backup data creation order. Even when the occurrence conditions of the production control error determination 42AKC3 are satisfied multiple times, the backup data may be created in the order in which the occurrence conditions are satisfied, and the writing process may be executed in the order of the backup data creation. .. In these cases, the writing is prohibited when the writing flag provided corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 or the effect control error determination 42AKC3 is ON, so that the previous occurrence condition is met. If the writing process is being executed, the writing process corresponding to the next occurrence condition is not executed. As described above, when the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied multiple times among the occurrence conditions of the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components, the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed. Then, a limit is set as a limit that the writing process corresponding to the next generation condition is not executed. As long as the writing process corresponding to the previous generation condition is not being executed, the writing process corresponding to the next generation condition may be executed.

When a plurality of generating conditions are satisfied, whether or not any one of the writing processes is executed may be determined according to the order in which the generating conditions are satisfied. For example, when another generating condition is satisfied during execution of the writing process corresponding to the generating condition that is satisfied first, the writing process corresponding to the generating condition that is satisfied later may not be executed. Alternatively, whether or not to execute any of the writing processes may be determined according to the processing priority when a plurality of generating conditions are satisfied. For example, among the exceptional events of the CPU 90131, the exceptional event with the high processing priority and the exceptional event with the low processing priority may be set in advance. If the conditions for the occurrence of the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are satisfied a plurality of times at the same time, the writing process corresponding to the exceptional event having the high processing priority is executed, and the writing process corresponding to the exceptional event having the low processing priority is performed. It may not be executed. In addition, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the overwrite process according to the process priority may be executed. For example, when the conditions for occurrence of the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are satisfied at the same time a plurality of times, the writing process corresponding to the exceptional event having the high processing priority stores the stored data by the writing process corresponding to the exceptional event having the low processing priority. It may be executed as an overwriting process for overwriting.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 43AK)
FIG. 28 shows an example of execution of backup processing relating to the characteristic part 43AK. In this case, the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes the program read from one or both of the external ROM 90121 and the internal ROM 90132, so that the functions of the memory writing processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 and the occurrence event information creation processing are performed. Functions of the units 43AKM21 and 43AKM22 are provided. The backup data memories 90210A to 90210C of the backup memory substrate 9014 are provided with the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 as well as the backup storage unit 43AKA21. The backup storage unit 43AKA11 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA11 to 43AKA113 as log areas. The backup storage unit 43AKA12 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA121 to 43AKA123 as log areas. The backup storage unit 43AKA13 is an 8-bit storage area and includes backup storage areas 43AKA131 to 43AKA133 as log areas. On the other hand, the backup storage unit 43AKA21 is a 3-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA21 to 43AKA213 as log areas. The 8-bit storage area is a storage area in which writing processing and reading processing of storage data can be executed in 8-bit units. The 3-bit storage area is a storage area in which a writing process and a reading process of stored data can be executed in units of 3 bits.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition of the storage area bit number "8" and the multiplicity "3" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is redundantly distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, which are 8-bit storage areas. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA111 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA121 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA131 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. , Is stored by copying and writing. The backup data acquired next from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA112 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA122 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA132 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is stored by copying and writing. The backup data further acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is the backup storage area 43AKA113 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA123 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA133 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is stored by copying and writing.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition of the storage area bit number being "3" and the multiplicity being "1" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory substrate 9014 and stored in the log area of the backup storage unit 43AKA21. For the backup storage unit 43AKA21, which is a 3-bit storage area, the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is less than the storage area of the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. It is stored in the area. Specifically, a 3-bit storage area that corresponds to a storage area bit number of “3” and becomes storage data in 3-bit units smaller than the 8-bit storage area of the 8-bit storage area is used. Further, when the multiplicity corresponds to "1", a single backup data is stored without being distributed without mirroring. For example, the backup data initially acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by being written in the backup storage area 43AKA211 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data acquired next from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by being written in the backup storage area 43AKA212 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data acquired next from the incident event information creation processing unit 22 is stored by being written in the backup storage area 43AKA213 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying.

In the backup control table 120T, when the backup target data is any one of the system data, the production control error data, the player history data, the received command data, and the set value change time data, the storage area bit number is “8” and is large. Severity is designated as "3". On the other hand, when the data is any one of the power saving setting data, the current time change data, the power off time data, the store name setting data, and the effect output amount data, the storage area bit number is “3” and the multiplicity is “1”. Is set to. For example, when the backup target data satisfies the backup condition corresponding to the system data, the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 by the memory writing processing unit 43AKM11. It is written and stored in the log area. On the other hand, when the backup target data satisfies the backup condition corresponding to the power saving setting data, the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is small in the backup storage unit 43AKA21 by the memory writing processing unit 43AKM12. It is written and stored in the log area. In this way, when writing the first information corresponding to the first generation condition, the same backup data is stored in the plurality of log areas in the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. On the other hand, when writing the second information corresponding to the second generation condition, the backup data is stored in a small log area in the backup storage unit 43AKA21.

For example, the occurrence condition at the time of power saving change, which is the backup condition for the backup target data corresponding to the power saving setting data, is less frequently satisfied than the occurrence condition at the time of data update, which is the backup condition for the backup target data corresponding to the system data. As described above, the second occurrence condition may be one that is less frequently satisfied than the first occurrence condition. The event corresponding to the occurrence condition that is frequently satisfied affects the storage of the log information regarding other events when the log information cannot be properly stored, for example, when noise occurs during the writing process. Is likely to give. An event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is rarely satisfied is less likely to affect the storage of log information regarding another event, as compared with an event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is frequently satisfied. Therefore, when the log information corresponding to the occurrence condition that is frequently satisfied is written, by storing the same backup data in a plurality of log areas, it is possible to prevent the trouble caused by the abnormality of the stored data from spreading. On the other hand, when the log information corresponding to the occurrence condition that is rarely satisfied is written, the backup data is stored in the small log area, so that the storage data capacity can be prevented from increasing.

The power saving setting data can be set by an administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901, such as an attendant of a game hall. As described above, the second information corresponding to the second generation condition may be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The data that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be reset by the administrator even if a problem occurs in the setting contents, and there is a possibility that the player of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be disadvantaged. Low. On the other hand, for example, data corresponding to the occurrence condition of an event that occurs according to the progress of a game or production is impossible or difficult to reset, and there is a high possibility that the player will be disadvantaged or distrusted. Shows information about. Therefore, when the log information corresponding to the occurrence condition that cannot be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is written, the same backup data is stored in a plurality of log areas, so that verification can be accurately performed when an abnormality occurs. The nature is enhanced. On the other hand, when the log information corresponding to the occurrence condition that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is written, the backup data is stored in a small log area, so that the storage data capacity can be prevented from increasing. The information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to the information shown in the power saving setting data, but the RTC information shown in the current time change data, the store name information shown in the store name setting data, It may be information of volume and light amount shown in the effect output amount data, or a combination of some or all of these. In addition, when a projector is used as the rendering device, information about display settings by the projector may be included in the information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Note that the display setting information by the projector can be set by a person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 901, unlike the staff at the game arcade. As described above, the manager of the pachinko gaming machine 901 may include a staff member of the gaming hall, or may include a person in charge of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The information that is not limited to the projector and may be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 901 may include information on the setting regarding the effect frequency using a specific effect device.

In the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 that are 8-bit storage areas, different backup storage areas may be provided according to the type of log information indicated in the backup data. For example, the backup storage area when the backup target data is the received command data may be provided as a storage area different from the backup storage area when the backup target data is the effect control error data. A backup storage area corresponding to an exceptional event of the CPU 90131 or an error interrupt request of the VDP 90140 may be provided inside or outside the backup storage area corresponding to the effect control error data. In this way, when the backup storage area according to the type of log information is provided in the 8-bit storage area, the memory write processing unit 43AKM11 determines that the backup storage area is determined according to the established backup condition. Then, the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 may be written and stored.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 44AK)
FIG. 29 shows a configuration example regarding the characteristic unit 44AK. In this configuration example, a first effect control board 44AK12A and a second effect control board 44AK12B are provided. The first effect control board 44AK12A and the second effect control board 44AK12B may have the configurations and functions of the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 in the above-described embodiment. A first control unit 44AK10A, a first backup storage unit 44AK11A, and a connector 44AK13A are mounted on the first effect control board 44AK12A. A second control unit 44AK10B, a second backup storage unit 44AK11B, and a connector 44AK13B are mounted on the second effect control board 44AK12B. The connector 44AK13A of the first effect control board 44AK12A is connected to the connector 44AK13B of the second effect control board 44AK12B. The connector 44AK13B of the second effect control board 44AK12B is connected to the connector 44AK11B of the first effect control board 44AK12A. The first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B may each have a part or all of the configuration and function of the effect control microcomputer 90120 in the above-described embodiment. For example, the first control unit 44AK10A has a configuration and functions related to the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120, and the second control unit 44AK10B has a configuration and functions related to the VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120. The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may each have a part or all of the configuration and function of the backup memory board 9014 in the above-described embodiment. For example, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A has a configuration and functions relating to the backup data memories 210A and 210B of the backup memory substrate 9014, and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B has a configuration relating to the backup data memories 210C and 210D of the backup memory substrate 9014. It has a function.

In the first effect control board 44AK12A, when the first control unit 44AK10A has the configuration and functions related to the CPU 90131 in the above-described embodiment, for example, the effect of the serial communication circuit 90137 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the effect data memory board 9016. A process for controlling the first electronic component such as a data memory is executed. In this case, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A stores backup data indicating log information regarding the first control unit 44AK10A. In the second effect control board 44AK12B, the second control unit 44AK10B has, for example, a voice processing circuit 90141, a lamp control circuit 90142, a motor control circuit of the effect control microcomputer 90120 when it has the configuration and functions related to the VDP 90140 in the above embodiment. A process for controlling the second electronic component such as 90143 and the image display device 905 is executed. In this case, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B stores backup data indicating log information regarding the second control unit 44AK10B. In this way, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A can store information about the first control unit 44AK10A, and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can store information about the second control unit 44AK10B.

When the first control unit 44AK10A has the configuration and functions related to the CPU 90131, the log information including the exceptional event information of the CPU 90131 is obtained by executing the exceptional time backup process of step S9042 in the CPU exceptional event occurrence process. It is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. When the second control unit 44AK10B has a configuration and functions related to the VDP 90140, the log information including the VDP error information of the VDP 90140 is executed by executing the error interrupt backup process of step S9052 in the VDP error interrupt process. Is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. In this way, when the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, the exceptional backup processing in the CPU exceptional event occurrence processing is executed. On the other hand, when the log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, VDP error allocation is performed as a process different from the case where the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. Backup processing at the time of error interruption in the interruption processing may be executed. In addition, arbitrary storage processing different from each other is performed when the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and when the log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. May be.

In the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, log information including exceptional event information of the CPU 90131 is stored. On the other hand, in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, log information including the VDP error information of the VDP 90140 is stored as information different from the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. Alternatively, the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A stores, for example, log information regarding an error that has occurred in the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B. On the other hand, in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, for example, log information regarding an error that has occurred in the image display device 905 is stored. In addition, in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, log information regarding arbitrary different electronic components may be stored.

It should be noted that the log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event relating to the first control unit 44AK10A may be stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, or in addition to or instead of this, log information may be stored. The log information corresponding to the event occurrence condition relating to the 2 control unit 44AK10B may be stored. In the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event relating to the second control unit 44AK10B may be stored. In addition to or instead of this, the first control Log information corresponding to the event occurrence condition relating to the unit 44AK10A may be stored. When both log information are stored in both log areas, even if a storage error occurs in one log area, an inspection such as analysis can be performed using the log information stored in the other log area. It becomes possible and reliability of the stored data is improved. The configuration and function of the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the configuration and function of the effect control microcomputer 90120 related to the VDP 90140 are not limited to being divided into the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B. For example, the configuration and function relating to the CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 may be divided into the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B. Alternatively, the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B may be provided corresponding to a plurality of CPUs. The first control unit 44AK10A may have a configuration and a function related to the CPU, and the second control unit 44AK10B may have a configuration and a function related to the light emission control.

The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B are different from the first effect control board 44AK12A having the first control unit 44AK10A and the second effect control board 44AK12B having the second control unit 44AK10B. For example, it may be mounted on the backup memory substrate 9014. In this case, log information about the electronic component called the first control unit 44AK10A mounted on the first effect control board 44AK12A and log information about the electronic component called the second control unit 44AK10B installed on the second effect control board 44AK12B. Can be stored in the log areas of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B mounted on the common backup memory substrate 9014. As described above, the backup data indicating the log information regarding the plurality of electronic components provided on the plurality of control boards may be stored in the log area of the storage device provided on the common backup memory board. Alternatively, the first backup memory board on which the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is mounted and the second backup memory board on which the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is mounted are the first effect control board 44AK12A and the second effect control board 44AK12B. It may be provided as a substrate different from.

For example, the storage data capacity of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is 1 MB (megabytes). On the other hand, the storage data capacity of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is 512 KB (kilobytes). In this way, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be configured as different storage devices in that the storage data capacities are different. Alternatively, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is configured by using a nonvolatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark). On the other hand, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is configured using, for example, an SRAM with a battery. When a nonvolatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) is used, the stored data can be erased by inputting a specific signal such as a clear signal. When the SRAM with battery is used, the stored data can be erased by removing the battery, for example, in addition to inputting the specific signal. Alternatively, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may have different storage data transmission methods. For example, the storage data of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is transmitted by the serial communication system, and the storage data of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is transmitted by the parallel communication system. The combination of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B and the serial communication system and the parallel communication system can be arbitrarily changed. In this case, the serial communication system may be capable of transmitting and receiving the communication data corresponding to the serial communication standard having a higher communication speed than the parallel communication system, or may be the serial communication standard having a lower communication speed than the parallel communication system. Corresponding communication data may be transmitted and received. The transmission speed of the stored data may be different depending on the configuration of the data line (whether shared or not), the hardware configuration of the communication circuit, or a combination thereof regardless of the serial communication standard. As described above, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B differ in the method of realizing the backup function, the difference in the material forming the memory cells, the method of erasing the stored data, and the storage data Both storage units may be configured as storage devices different from each other in that the transmission method or the transmission speed of the stored data is different. In addition, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be configured as storage devices different from each other due to arbitrary differences. In the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, the storage data capacity, the method of implementing the backup function, the material for forming the memory cells, the method of erasing the storage data, and any other device configuration or storage function Some or all of them may be configured as a common storage device. The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can have any combination of configurations and functions.

The first backup storage unit 44AK11A can hold the stored contents without using a backup power source, as in the case of being configured using FRAM (registered trademark), for example. In this case, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can hold the stored contents by using a backup power source, as in the case where the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is configured by using an SRAM with a battery. In such a configuration, the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be partially or entirely stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. When some log information is stored, the target log information is based on update frequency, update data amount, data importance, target parts, target control, or a combination of some or all of these. , It may be predetermined. In a storage device capable of holding stored contents by using a backup power supply, the stored data is erased when the backup power supply disappears. Therefore, the stored data of the storage device that can retain the stored content by using the backup power supply is stored in the storage device that can retain the stored content without using the backup power supply to ensure the loss of the stored data. It can be prevented.

Whether to display on the maintenance history screen according to whether the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A or the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. The settings may be different. For example, the log information stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A can be displayed on the maintenance history screen, while the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is displayed on the maintenance history screen. It may be set not to be displayed. Even in this case, if the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is also stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, substantially all log information is stored. It can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. However, since the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is not the read target when the maintenance history screen is displayed, the log information stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. Handling is different from. Not limited to the display of the maintenance history screen, the setting of whether or not to read the log information is different between the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B when performing arbitrary output. Good. As described above, the range of the log information stored in one of the log areas of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is not a read target when performing output. May be provided. On the other hand, in the range of the log information stored in the other log area, it may be a read target when outputting.

The configuration and functions of the effect control board 9012 and the backup memory board 9014 in the above-described embodiment are as follows: It is realized by a configuration divided into a second effect control board 44AK12B provided with a second backup storage unit 44AK11B. In this case, for example, separate developers share the development of the configuration and functions of the first effect control board 44AK12A and the development of the configuration and functions of the second effect control board 44AK12B, and proceed in parallel. be able to. This reduces the burden of development work and prevents an increase in manufacturing cost.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 45AK)
FIG. 30 shows a setting example of the inspection designation command relating to the characteristic part 45AK. The inspection designation command is included in a plurality of test commands received when executing backup inspection processing, for example. FIG. 30A shows a setting example 45AK01 of an inspection output command and an inspection specifying command that can specify a communication method. The inspection output unit may be any connector as long as it can select and specify the connector used as the inspection signal output unit from the connectors 90152 to 156, for example. The inspection output section may be capable of inputting/outputting the inspection signal and outputting the read signal corresponding to the backup data. The communication method may be parallel or serial, and in the case of serial, any serial communication standard such as UART, SPI, and I2C may be selected and designated. As the inspection designation command in the setting example 45AK01, a plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 are prepared in advance. The plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 may have different designation contents of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 and the communication method.

The connector 90152 is wire-connected to the effect control relay board 9017, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as the driver circuit mounted on the driver board 9019, the effect motor 9060, and the effect LED 9061. The connector 90153 is wire-connected to the lamp output board 9013 and can output a control signal to an electronic component such as a driver circuit mounted on the lamp output board 9013. The connector 90154 is wire-connected to the backup memory board 9014 and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as the RTC 90201 mounted on the backup memory board 9014, the serial communication circuit 90202, and the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D. The connector 90155 is wire-connected to the effect data memory board 9016, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as a plurality of effect data memories mounted on the effect data memory board 9016. As described above, the connectors 90152 to 90155 can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components. On the other hand, the connectors 90152 to 90155 are designated as any of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, and thus read signals of backup data indicating the log information read from the log area. It is possible to output a read signal corresponding to the stored information. Since the connector 90156 is connected to the inspection device of the pachinko gaming machine 901 by wiring, a control signal for the electronic component is not output. On the other hand, the connector 90156 can output a read signal according to the stored information, such as a read signal of backup data indicating the log information read from the log area. For example, the connector 90156 becomes the output terminal of the read signal according to the log information by being designated as one of the test output sections 45AKC to 45AKC4 by the test designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4.

The inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 that can be designated by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 may include a part of the connectors 90152 to 156, or may include all of the connectors 90152 to 156. The inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 may include connectors common to each other, or may include connectors different from other inspection output units. For example, the effect relay wiring connector 90152 can input and output a plurality of types of control signals and detection signals according to the specifications of various circuits mounted on the effect control relay board 9017, the audio output board 9018, and the driver board 9019. It suffices if it is configured and included in the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4. On the other hand, for example, the frame lamp wiring connector 90153 is configured to be capable of inputting and outputting a parallel signal, and is included in the inspection output unit 45AKC1 of the inspection specifying command 45AKA1 in which parallel is specified as the communication method. On the other hand, the connector 90153 is not included in the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection specification commands 45AKA2 to 45AKA4 in which any one of the serial communication standards is specified as the communication method. Further, for example, the backup wiring connector 90154 is configured to be capable of inputting and outputting a signal conforming to the SPI serial communication standard, and the inspection output unit 45AKC3 of the inspection specifying command 45AKA3 in which the SPI serial communication standard is specified as the communication method. include. On the other hand, the connector 90154 is not included in the inspection output units 45AKC1, 45AKC2, 45AKC4 of the inspection specification commands 45AKA1, 45AKA2, 45AKA4 in which parallel or UART or I2C serial signal standard is specified as the communication method. As described above, the connectors 90152 to 90155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components include the connector 90152 capable of outputting signals by a plurality of signal systems and the connectors 90153, 154 capable of outputting signals at a specific signal system. May be included. Further, the connectors 90152 to 156 that can be designated as the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 output connectors 90152 to 90155 that can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components and control signals for the electronic components. Connector 90156 which is not provided. By specifying the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection specification commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, a signal output unit corresponding to a plurality of types of received information is selected from a plurality of mutually different signal output units such as the connectors 90152 to 156. Then, the inspection information corresponding to the inspection signal, such as the read signal of the backup data, can be output.

The CPU 90131 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 can execute various lottery processes related to the presence or absence of the effect and the effect mode, such as a lottery process for the notice effect. Based on the lottery result of the lottery process, control signals corresponding to various control information are output. For example, when it is determined to execute a specific notice effect as the lottery result of the notice effect, the control signal for reading the pattern data of the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the notice effect is the connector for the effect data wiring. It is output from 90155 and transmitted to the effect data memory board 9016 via the effect data wiring. In this case, according to the pattern data of the read-out notice effect control pattern, a control signal (voice signal) for controlling the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R and a control signal for controlling the drive state of the effect motor 9060. (Drive control signal) and the like are output from the connector 90152 for effect relay wiring and transmitted to the effect control relay board 9017 via the effect relay wiring. In addition, a control signal (electric decoration signal) for controlling the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 909 is output from the connector 90153 for frame lamp wiring and transmitted to the lamp output board via the frame lamp wiring. On the other hand, the connector 90154 for backup wiring can output a control signal for electronic parts such as the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D provided on the backup memory board 9014. This control signal is a result of the lottery process. It is not output based on. As described above, the connectors 90152 to 90155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components include connectors 90152, 90153, 90155 capable of outputting control signals based on the lottery result, and a connector 90154 different from these. There is.

It suffices that the connectors 90152, 90153, 90155 can output control signals based on the lottery result and can output control signals not depending on the lottery result. As an example, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received, a control signal for controlling the demonstration effect without executing the lottery process is output from the connectors 90152, 153, 155 and the like. It Of these, the connector 90152 for effect relay wiring is a control signal (voice signal) for controlling the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R and a control signal (drive control signal) for controlling the drive state of the effect motor 9060. It is possible to output control signals according to the control information of the speakers 908L and 908R as the production devices, the production motor 9060, and the production LED 9061. The frame lamp wiring connector 90153 can output a control signal according to the control information of the game effect lamp 909 as a production device, such as a control signal (electric decoration signal) for controlling the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 909. is there. On the other hand, the connector 90155 for effect data wiring can output a control signal according to control information of an electronic component different from the effect device, such as a control signal for controlling the reading process of the effect data memory. In addition, the connector 90154 for backup wiring can output a control signal according to control information of an electronic component different from the production device, such as a control signal for controlling the reading process and the writing process of the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D. Is. In this way, the connectors 90152 to 90155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components are connectors 90152 and 90153 capable of outputting control signals according to the control information of the rendering device, and control signals for electronic components other than the rendering device. And connectors 90154 and 90155 capable of outputting

FIG. 30B shows a setting example 45AK02 of the inspection designation command capable of designating the inspection output data. The output data for inspection can be designated as backup data indicating log information by selecting a part or all of the data stored in the log area of the backup data memories 90210A to 90210D provided on the backup memory board 9014. If The inspection output data is output from one of the connectors 90152 to 156 designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4. As the inspection designation command in the setting example 45AK02, a plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKB1 to 45AKB12 are prepared in advance. The plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKB1 to 45AKB12 have different inspection output data.

The inspection designation command 45AKB1 designates system data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB2 designates the production control error data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation 45 command AKB3 designates the player history data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB4 designates the received command data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB5 designates the setting change time data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB6 designates the power saving setting data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB7 designates the current time setting data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB8 designates the power-off time data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB9 designates the store name setting data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB10 designates the effect output amount data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB11 designates the effect history data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB12 designates all stored data as inspection output data.

The backup data that can be output by designating it as the inspection output data may indicate information about a plurality of electronic components or game-related information about a game. For example, when the production control error data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB2, the backup data including the production control error data can be output, and the error that occurs in the electronic component including the production device can be specified. Backup data is output.

On the other hand, when the player history data is designated as the test output data by the test designation command 45AKB3, it becomes possible to output the backup data including the player history data, and whether an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. Regardless of whether or not the data regarding the player is updated, the backup data at the time of data update is output. When the reception command data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB4, the backup data including the reception command data can be output, regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. Backup data at the time of receiving the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 is output. When the store name setting data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB9, the backup data including the store name setting data can be output, and whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. Instead, the backup data when the name of the store corresponding to the game hall is set is output. When the system data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB1, the backup data including the system data can be output. Backup data including system data is stored regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred and backup data at the time of updating data due to an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components. This includes backup data when updating data. About system data By outputting the backup data at the time of updating the data, regardless of whether the event corresponding to multiple electronic components occurs or whether the event corresponding to multiple electronic components occurs The backup data at the time of updating the data are output. In this way, it is possible to output information about electronic parts, game-related information about games, or general information not related to electronic parts or games according to the specified contents of the inspection output data by the inspection specifying command. .. It should be noted that the content specified by the inspection output data by the inspection specification command is not limited to the information about the electronic component or the information about the electronic component according to an arbitrary detection result such as a detection result of a predetermined operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B. The output information may be switchable, such as game-related information about a game or general information that is not related to electronic parts or games. Not limited to the detection result, it is possible to switch output information such as information about electronic parts, game-related information about games, or general information not related to electronic parts or games according to arbitrary control or processing. I wish I had it.

(About transformation and application)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, and a part described in the above-mentioned embodiment so that at least one problem in the conventional technology can be solved. It may be provided with the structure of.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 may not perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As an example, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) a start winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device provided in the game area is released from the closed state (second state) to the open state ( (1st state), when the game ball entering the inside of the variable winning device enters a specific area (V winning opening) of the plurality of areas, it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured to.

In the above-described embodiment, the “proportion” and the “probability” at which various kinds of decisions are made are, for example, 70:30 and 0% (never decided) or 100% (must be decided). It may be set so that it is not determined), and the possibility that at least one of the determination results will be 0% (never determined) or 100% (certainly determined) It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, if the proportion of any one of the plurality of decision results is higher than the proportion of the other decision results, the proportion of one decision result is It may be included that it is 100%, and that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of 1 is 100%, the ratio of other determinations is 0%. Further, when the ratio of the other determination result is 0%, if the ratio of the determination result of 1 is other than 100% and is a predetermined ratio that is not 0%, the ratio of the determination result of 1 is the other determination result. Will be higher than the ratio.

In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the process shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the sound output operation in the speaker, and various effects including the lighting effect in the game effect lamp and the effect LED. The operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, and encloses the game medium to score points based on the occurrence of a prize. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a.

The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to a slot machine or the like. The slot machine is, for example, an arbitrary gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information, and imparting a predetermined game value based on the game result, and more specifically, The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets (the number of medals or the number of credits) for one game, and at the same time, a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (design) that can be identified by each ( One game is completed by deriving and displaying the display results of, for example, a plurality of reels, etc., and a prize is awarded according to the display result (for example, cherry prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, replay prize, BB prize, RB prize, etc.). Is a gaming machine that is capable of generating. In such a slot machine, the hardware resources including the effect moving mechanism provided on the front surface side of the slot machine and the software for performing the predetermined processing cooperate with each other, so that the pachinko machine shown in the above embodiment is operated. The gaming machine 901 may be configured to have all or some of the features.

The slot machine is not limited to one in which the number of bets is set by using medals and credits as a gaming value, and is only a slot machine in which the number of bets is set by using a gaming ball as a gaming value, or only credits as a gaming value. It may be a fully creditable slot machine in which the bet amount is set using. When using a game ball as a game medium, for example, one medal can be made to correspond to five game balls. For example, when 3 is set as the number of bets, the number of bets using 15 game balls is used. Is equivalent to the one that sets. The pachinko gaming machine 901 and the slot machine are not limited to those that use only one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls. For example, a plurality of types such as medals and gaming balls may be used. It may be one that can be used together with the gaming value. For example, a slot machine can set a bet number and play a game using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and when a prize is won, a plurality of medals and game balls etc. can be played. Any type of gaming value may be payable.

The programs and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in a gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 or a slot machine, by a removable recording medium. However, it may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(Explanation on Problem Solving Means and Effects of Characteristic Section 41AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 capable of playing a game, and a control means capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components such as a production control microcomputer 90120 and power supply to the gaming machine are stopped. Even if the storage contents can be retained and the information about a plurality of electronic components can be stored, for example, a storage unit such as backup data memories 90210A to 90210D is provided. When the occurrence condition is satisfied, for example, a writing process by the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 can be executed as the writing process for writing the information in the storage unit, and the storage unit includes, for example, the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13. A storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first occurrence condition is written and a storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second occurrence condition is written are provided as one continuous area, such as the backup storage unit 41AKA1. For example, when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied, such as the write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is ON, while the process of writing the information corresponding to the one condition is being performed, the other Do not execute the process of writing the information corresponding to the condition. As described above, since the process of writing the information corresponding to the other one is not executed during the process of writing the information corresponding to one of the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition, the conflict of the information writing process is avoided. It This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The generation condition may be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means, such as the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. In this way, when the generation condition according to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing process for writing the information about the electronic component in the storage means is executed to store the information about the electronic component including the control means. be able to. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The first occurrence condition can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means, such as the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, and the second occurrence condition can be established by the control means such as the effect control error determination 41AKC3. It is possible to be satisfied according to the processing result. For example, as shown in FIG. 15B, when the first occurrence condition is satisfied, the writing process is executed with priority over the case where the second occurrence condition is satisfied. It may be possible. In this way, when the first generating condition that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing is given priority over when the second generating condition that can be satisfied according to the processing result by the control means is satisfied. By executing the plug-in process, the priority of the write process is set while avoiding the conflict of the write process of the information about the electronic component. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the next condition is determined according to the execution information indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition, such as the writing flag 41AKF1, is being executed. The process of writing the corresponding information may be restricted. If the process of writing information is restricted according to such execution information, conflict of processes can be easily avoided. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

In the writing process, the same information may be stored in a plurality of storage areas such as the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this way, if the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas, the reliability of the information can be improved. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When the write condition different from the generation condition is satisfied, the control unit writes the game-related information different from the information about the plurality of electronic components to the storage unit, for example, the backup process according to the setting of the backup control table 120T. May be feasible. As described above, if the process of writing the game-related information corresponding to the writing condition different from the generation condition becomes executable, various information can be stored and managed. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, output means capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, such as connectors 90152 to 90155, and capable of outputting a read signal according to stored information in the storage means may be provided. Since such output means can output the control signal and the read signal, it is possible to prevent the device configuration from becoming complicated and the manufacturing cost from increasing. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, a connector 90156, which outputs control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and a first output means such as connectors 90152 to 90155, and a read signal which is different from the first output means and which corresponds to stored information in the storage means. And second output means such as. As described above, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

(Explanation on Problem Solving Means and Effects of Characteristic Section 42AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 capable of playing a game, and a control means capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components such as a production control microcomputer 90120 and power supply to the gaming machine are stopped. Even if the storage contents can be retained and the information about a plurality of electronic components can be stored, for example, a storage unit such as backup data memories 90210A to 90210D is provided. When the generation condition is satisfied, as the writing process for writing the information in the storage unit, for example, the writing process by the memory writing processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 can be executed, and the storage unit can be, for example, the backup storage areas 42AKA111 to 42AKA113. A storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first occurrence condition is written, such as a backup storage unit 42AKA11 including the backup storage area 42AKA21, the backup storage area 42AKA21 including the backup storage areas 42AKA21, and the backup storage area 42AKA31 including the backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313 , The storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written is provided as a different area, and the first generation condition and the second generation condition such as the memory write processing by the memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13. When is satisfied, it is possible to execute the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition while the process of writing the information corresponding to the one condition is being performed. As described above, since the process of writing the information corresponding to the other one can be executed while the process of writing the information corresponding to one of the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition is executed, the efficiency of the process of writing the information can be improved. .. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The generation condition may be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means, such as the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. In this way, when the generation condition according to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing process for writing the information about the electronic component in the storage means is executed to store the information about the electronic component including the control means. be able to. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The first occurrence condition can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means, such as the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, and the second occurrence condition can be established by the control means such as the effect control error determination 41AKC3. It is possible to be satisfied according to the processing result. For example, as shown in FIG. 15B, when the first occurrence condition is satisfied, the writing process is executed with priority over the case where the second occurrence condition is satisfied. It may be possible. In this way, when the first generating condition that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing is given priority over when the second generating condition that can be satisfied according to the processing result by the control means is satisfied. By executing the plug-in process, the priority of the write process is set while avoiding the conflict of the write process of the information about the electronic component. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the next condition is determined according to the execution information indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition, such as the writing flag 41AKF1, is being executed. The process of writing the corresponding information may be restricted. If the process of writing information is restricted according to such execution information, conflict of processes can be easily avoided. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

In the writing process, the same information may be stored in a plurality of storage areas such as the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this way, if the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas, the reliability of the information can be improved. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When the write condition different from the generation condition is satisfied, the control unit writes the game-related information different from the information about the plurality of electronic components to the storage unit, for example, the backup process according to the setting of the backup control table 120T. May be feasible. As described above, if the process of writing the game-related information corresponding to the writing condition different from the generation condition becomes executable, various information can be stored and managed. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, output means capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, such as connectors 90152 to 90155, and capable of outputting a read signal according to stored information in the storage means may be provided. Since such output means can output the control signal and the read signal, it is possible to prevent the device configuration from becoming complicated and the manufacturing cost from increasing. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, a connector 90156, which outputs control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and a first output means such as connectors 90152 to 90155, and a read signal which is different from the first output means and which corresponds to stored information in the storage means. And second output means such as. As described above, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

(Explanation on Problem Solving Means and Effects of Characteristic Section 43AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 capable of playing a game, and a control means capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components such as a production control microcomputer 90120 and power supply to the gaming machine are stopped. Even if the storage content can be retained and information about a plurality of electronic components can be stored, for example, a storage unit such as backup data memories 90210A to 90210D is provided, and the control unit, when the write condition is satisfied, As the writing process for writing the information into the storage unit, for example, the writing process by the memory writing processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 can be executed, and when writing the first information corresponding to the first occurrence condition, for example, the backup storage unit When the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas such as 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 and the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written, the information is stored in a storage area smaller than the plurality of storage areas such as the backup storage unit 43AKA21. Memorize As described above, by providing the case where the same information is stored in the plurality of storage areas and the case where the information is stored in the storage area smaller than the plurality of storage areas, various information corresponding to the information about the plurality of electronic components can be obtained. Memories are made. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When the storage information is determined to be normal in a predetermined number of storage areas among the plurality of storage areas that store the same information as the first information, restoration is performed based on the storage information, for example, restoration by power-on information processing. The process may be executable. In this way, since the restoration process is executed when the stored information is determined to be normal in the predetermined number of storage areas, the reliability of the restoration based on the stored information is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When it is determined that the stored information corresponding to the second information is abnormal, it may be possible to execute an initial process for setting the initial information, such as initial value setting by power-on information processing. In this way, the initial process of setting the initial information is executed, so that it is possible to prevent a malfunction when it is determined that there is an abnormality. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The second occurrence condition may be less frequently satisfied than the first occurrence condition, such as a backup condition when power saving is set. In this way, various memories are performed by providing the second occurrence condition that is less frequently satisfied. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The second information may be setting information that can be set by the administrator of the gaming machine, such as power saving setting data. In this way, by storing the setting information that can be set by the administrator of the gaming machine, various kinds of storage are performed. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, connection wiring connecting the control unit and the storage unit, such as wiring connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 90154 and the terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 90220, and, for example, the terminals TM01 and TM02 of the connector 90154 and the terminal TM11 of the connector 90220. , TM12 may be provided with a connection confirmation wiring capable of confirming the connection state between the control means and the storage means. As described above, the reliability of the storage is enhanced by providing the connection confirmation wiring capable of confirming the connection state. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, output means capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, such as connectors 90152 to 90155, and capable of outputting a read signal according to stored information in the storage means may be provided. Since such output means can output the control signal and the read signal, it is possible to prevent the device configuration from becoming complicated and the manufacturing cost from increasing. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, unlike the first output means such as connectors 90152 to 90155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and the first output means such as connector 90156, it is possible to output a read signal according to the stored information of the storage means. Second output means may be provided. As described above, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

(Explanation on Problem Solving Means and Effects of Characteristic Section 44AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 capable of playing a game, for example, a first control unit 44AK10A, a first control unit capable of controlling a first electronic component, and a second control unit 44AK10B, for example. , Second control means capable of controlling the second electronic component, and capable of retaining stored contents even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, capable of storing information regarding the first control means and the second control means, for example, A storage unit such as backup data memories 90210A to 90210D is provided, and when a write condition is satisfied, a writing process for writing information to the storage unit can be executed, and the storage unit stores information related to the first control unit. First storage means capable of, for example, the first backup storage section 44AK11A, and unlike the first storage means, second storage means capable of storing information regarding the second control means, such as the second backup storage section 44AK11B. Including and In this way, unlike the first storage means capable of storing information about the first control means, the second storage means capable of storing information about the second control means is provided, so that various storages according to the control means are provided. Is done. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

When writing the information regarding the first control means, it may be possible to execute, for example, the CPU exception event occurrence processing or the VDP error interrupt processing as the processing different from the case where the information regarding the second control means is written. In this way, by performing different processing, various types of storage are performed according to the control means. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The first storage means is capable of storing information relating to an occurrence event corresponding to the first electronic component, such as log information including exception event information of the CPU 90131, and the second storage means is capable of storing VDP error interrupt information of the VDP 90140, for example. It may be possible to store information regarding an occurrence event corresponding to the second electronic component, such as log information including the log information. In this way, by storing the information regarding the occurrence event according to different electronic components, various storages according to the electronic components are performed. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The first control means can be installed as a board different from the first storage means, for example, on the first effect control board 9012A, and the second control means is a board different from the second storage means, for example, the second effect. It may be installable on the control board 9012B or the like. In this way, by installing the control means and the storage means on different substrates, maintenance work becomes easy and a flexible device configuration becomes possible. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The first storage means can hold the stored contents by using a backup power supply, for example, when an SRAM with a battery is used, and the second storage means uses a backup power supply, for example, by using FRAM (registered trademark). The stored content may be retained without being used, and the second storage means may be able to store a part of the stored content in the first storage means. As described above, the certain storage content of the first storage unit is also stored in the second storage unit, so that the reliability of the storage is improved. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, connection wires connecting the first and second control means and the second control means to the storage means, such as wires connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 90154 and the terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 90220, and the terminal TM01 of the connector 90154, A connection confirmation wiring capable of confirming a connection state between the first control unit and the second control unit and the storage unit, such as a wiring connected to the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the TM02 and the connector 90220, may be provided. As described above, the reliability of the storage is enhanced by providing the connection confirmation wiring capable of confirming the connection state. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, a display unit such as the image display device 905 may be provided, and for example, when displaying a maintenance history screen, the storage information of the second storage unit may be output by the display of the display unit. In this way, the stored information is output by the display, so that the stored content can be easily confirmed. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

For example, a first output unit capable of outputting control signals for the first electronic component and the second electronic component, such as connectors 90152 to 90155, and reading according to stored information in the storage unit, unlike the first output unit, such as connector 90156. Second output means capable of outputting a signal may be provided. As described above, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

(Explanation on Problem Solving Means and Effects of Characteristic Part 45AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 capable of playing a game, capable of controlling electronic components, such as control means such as a production control microcomputer 90120, and a control signal outputable connector, for example, a connector. 90152 to 90155 and other output means, the output means can output a control signal according to at least a part of the control information based on the lottery result by the control means, for example, the first connector 90152, 153, 155 or the like. The output unit and the second output unit different from the first output unit include, for example, a connector 90154. As described above, since the second output means different from the first output means capable of outputting the control signal based on the lottery result is provided, various signals are output. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The second output means outputs the control signal through a route different from the first output means in the same substrate as the first output means, for example, when a connector 90154 different from the connectors 90152, 153, 155 is installed. It may be possible. In this way, since the control signal is output via different paths, the reliability of various signal outputs can be enhanced. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The second output means may be able to output a control signal according to the control information of the rendering device, for example, when the connector 90152 is designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4. In this way, by outputting the control signal according to the control information of the rendering device, various signals are output. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The second output unit may be capable of outputting a control signal of a signal system different from that of the first output unit, for example, a communication system according to the output section setting example 45AK01. In this way, by outputting control signals of different signal systems, various signals are output. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

A mounting member, such as a connector 90156, capable of mounting a connecting unit to which the inspection device of the gaming machine is connected may be provided, and the mounting member may be soldered when the connecting unit is not mounted. By performing such a soldering process, disconnection due to oxidation or corrosion can be prevented even when not mounted. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The control means can execute, for example, a backup inspection process as an inspection process for outputting inspection information about the electronic component based on the received information, and, for example, the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4, etc., according to a plurality of types of received information. The inspection information may be output by different output means. As described above, the inspection information is output by the output unit according to the received information, whereby the flexibility of information output is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

The output means may be capable of outputting information about electronic components such as effect control error data and game-related information about games such as system data and received command data. In this way, by outputting the information about the electronic component and the game-related information about the game, various information is output. This makes it possible to manage information appropriately.

1 ... pachinko game machine 2 ... game board 3 ... game machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 6A ... winning ball device 6B ... variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize hole 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary pattern display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23... Count switch 30... Hitting ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123 ... Display control unit 901 ... Pachinko gaming machine 9011 ... Main board 9012 ... Production control board 9014 ... Backup memory board 90120 ... Production control microcomputer 90131 ... CPU
90140 ... VDP
90150-90156... Connector 90210A-90210D... Backup data memory

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage to the player,
A detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player,
Based on the detection by the detection unit, a predetermined effect execution unit capable of executing a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes,
And a determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied,
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a first suggestion mode that suggests which setting value among a plurality of setting values, and a first suggestion mode that suggests that a specific setting value among the plurality of setting values is set. Including two suggested aspects,
The predetermined effect execution means,
When the first condition is satisfied based on the detection by the detection means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the first suggestive aspect, and
When the determination unit determines that the special condition is satisfied, and when the second condition is satisfied based on the detection by the detection unit after the first condition is satisfied, the second suggestion mode is adopted. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect,
If the first condition is satisfied but the second condition is not satisfied when it is determined by the determination means that the special condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect is produced by the first suggestion mode. Is feasible,
further,
Control means capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components,
Even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the stored contents can be held, and a storage means capable of storing information on the plurality of electronic components is provided,
The control means is capable of executing a writing process for writing the information in the storage means when a condition for occurrence of an event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied.
The storage means is provided with a storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and a storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written, as one continuous area,
When the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition is being executed, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition is not executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.